One document matched: draft-ietf-megaco-h248v2-03.txt

Differences from draft-ietf-megaco-h248v2-02.txt




   Media Gateway Control (megaco)                C. Groves, M. Pantaleo 
   Internet Draft                                           LM Ericsson 
   Document: draft-ietf-megaco-h248v2-03.txt                T. Anderson 
   Expires: April 2002                              Lucent Technologies 
                                                              T. Taylor 
                                                        Nortel Networks 
                                                              (Editors) 
                                                           October 2002 
    
    
           The Megaco/H.248 Gateway Control Protocol, version 2 

tatus of this Memo 

   This document is an Internet-Draft and is in full conformance with 
   all provisions of Section 10 of RFC2026.  
    
   Internet-Drafts are working documents of the Internet Engineering 
   Task Force (IETF), its areas, and its working groups.  Note that      
   other groups may also distribute working documents as Internet-
   Drafts. 
    
   Internet-Drafts are draft documents valid for a maximum of six months 
   and may be updated, replaced, or obsoleted by other documents at any 
   time.  It is inappropriate to use Internet-Drafts as reference 
   material or to cite them other than as "work in progress." 
    
   The list of current Internet-Drafts can be accessed at 
        http://www.ietf.org/ietf/1id-abstracts.txt 
   The list of Internet-Draft Shadow Directories can be accessed at 
        http://www.ietf.org/shadow.html. 

Abstract 

   This document describes the second version of the general-purpose 
   gateway control protocol standardized as Megaco in the IETF and as 
   Recommendation H.248 (now H.248.1) in the ITU-T.  It is common text 
   with Recommendation H.248.1 (05/02), published by the ITU-T.  Megaco 
   v2 includes the corrections to RFC 3015 which resulted in RFC xxxx 
   [draft-ietf-megaco-3015corr-02.txt], plus the following new 
   capabilities: 

   - ability to audit specific properties, events, signals and 
   statistics 
   - use of serviceChange to indicate that capabilities have changed in 
   the Media Gateway 
   - playing a signal on the Root Termination 
   - limiting the number of repetitions of transaction pending 
   - allowing topology to be set per stream 
   - ability to audit context properties 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 1] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   - new Nx64K multiplex type 
   - provision for digit buffering when a digit map completes. 

   In addition, the use of the Modem Descriptor was deprecated. 

   A detailed list of changes from draft-ietf-megaco-3015corr-
   02.txt/H.248.1 (03/02) to this document is given in Appendix II at 
   the end of this document.   

onventions used in this document 

   The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT", 
   "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED",  "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this 
   document are to be interpreted as described in RFC-2119. 





































roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 2] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


able of Contents 

   1           SCOPE.................................................6 
    
   2           REFERENCES............................................6 
   2.1         Normative references..................................7 
   2.2         Informative references................................9 
    
   3           DEFINITIONS..........................................10 
    
   4           ABBREVIATIONS........................................11 
    
   5           A NOTE ON CONVENTIONS................................12 
    
   6           CONNECTION MODEL.....................................12 
   6.1         Contexts.............................................15 
   6.1.1       Context attributes and descriptors...................16 
   6.1.2       Creating, deleting and modifying Contexts............16 
   6.2         Terminations.........................................16 
   6.2.1       Termination dynamics.................................20 
   6.2.2       TerminationIDs.......................................20 
   6.2.3       Packages.............................................21 
   6.2.4       Termination properties and descriptors...............22 
   6.2.5       Root Termination.....................................24 
    
   7           COMMANDS.............................................25 
   7.1         Descriptors..........................................26 
   7.1.1       Specifying parameters................................26 
   7.1.2       Modem descriptor.....................................27 
   7.1.3       Multiplex descriptor.................................27 
   7.1.4       Media descriptor.....................................28 
   7.1.5       TerminationState descriptor..........................28 
   7.1.6       Stream descriptor....................................29 
   7.1.7       LocalControl descriptor..............................30 
   7.1.8       Local and Remote descriptors.........................31 
   7.1.9       Events descriptor....................................34 
   7.1.10      EventBuffer descriptor...............................37 
   7.1.11      Signals descriptor...................................37 
   7.1.12      Audit descriptor.....................................39 
   7.1.13      ServiceChange descriptor.............................40 
   7.1.14      DigitMap descriptor..................................40 
   7.1.14.1    DigitMap definition, creation, modification and 
                   deletion.........................................40 
   7.1.14.2    DigitMap Timers......................................41 
   7.1.14.3    DigitMap Syntax......................................41 
   7.1.14.4    DigitMap Completion Event............................42 
   7.1.14.5    DigitMap Procedures..................................43 
   7.1.14.6    DigitMap Activation..................................45 
   7.1.14.7    Interaction Of DigitMap and Event Processing.........45 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 3] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   7.1.14.8    Wildcards............................................46 
   7.1.14.9    Example..............................................46 
   7.1.15      Statistics descriptor................................47 
   7.1.16      Packages descriptor..................................47 
   7.1.17      ObservedEvents descriptor............................47 
   7.1.18      Topology descriptor..................................47 
   7.1.19      Error Descriptor.....................................51 
    
   7.2         Command Application Programming Interface............51 
   7.2.1       Add..................................................52 
   7.2.2       Modify...............................................53 
   7.2.3       Subtract.............................................54 
   7.2.4       Move.................................................56 
   7.2.5       AuditValue...........................................57 
   7.2.6       AuditCapabilities....................................60 
   7.2.7       Notify...............................................62 
   7.2.8       ServiceChange........................................63 
   7.2.9       Manipulating and Auditing Context Attributes.........68 
   7.2.10      Generic Command Syntax...............................69 
    
   8           TRANSACTIONS.........................................69 
   8.1         Common parameters....................................71 
   8.1.1       Transaction Identifiers..............................71 
   8.1.2       Context Identifiers..................................71 
   8.2         Transaction Application Programming Interface........71 
   8.2.1       TransactionRequest...................................72 
   8.2.2       TransactionReply.....................................72 
   8.2.3       TransactionPending...................................74 
   8.3         Messages.............................................75 
    
   9           TRANSPORT............................................75 
   9.1         Ordering of Commands.................................76 
   9.2         Protection against Restart Avalanche.................77 
    
   10          SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS..............................78 
   10.1        Protection of Protocol Connections...................79 
   10.2        Interim AH scheme....................................79 
   10.3        Protection of Media Connections......................80 
    
   11          MG-MGC CONTROL INTERFACE.............................81 
   11.1        Multiple Virtual MGs.................................81 
   11.2        Cold start...........................................82 
   11.3        Negotiation of protocol version......................82 
   11.4        Failure of a MG......................................83 
   11.5        Failure of an MGC....................................84 
    
   12          PACKAGE DEFINITION...................................85 
   12.1        Guidelines for defining packages.....................85 
   12.1.1      Package..............................................86 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 4] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   12.1.2      Properties...........................................87 
   12.1.3      Events...............................................88 
   12.1.4      Signals..............................................88 
   12.1.5      Statistics...........................................89 
   12.1.6      Procedures...........................................89 
   12.2        Guidelines to defining Parameters to Events and 
                   Signals..........................................89 
   12.3        Lists................................................90 
   12.4        Identifiers..........................................90 
   12.5        Package registration.................................91 
    
   13          PROFILE DEFINITION...................................91 
    
   14          IANA CONSIDERATIONS..................................92 
   14.1        Packages.............................................92 
   14.2        Error codes..........................................93 
   14.3        ServiceChange reasons................................93 
   14.4        Profiles.............................................94 
    
   ANNEX A     BINARY ENCODING OF THE PROTOCOL......................95 
   A.1         Coding of wildcards..................................95 
   A.2         ASN.1 syntax specification...........................96 
    
   ANNEX B     TEXT ENCODING OF THE PROTOCOL.......................120 
   B.1         Coding of wildcards.................................120 
   B.2         ABNF specification..................................120 
   B.4         Hexadecimal octet sequence..........................137 
    
   ANNEX C     TAGS FOR MEDIA STREAM PROPERTIES....................138 
   C.1         General media attributes............................138 
   C.2         Mux properties......................................140 
   C.3         General bearer properties...........................140 
   C.4         General ATM properties..............................141 
   C.5         Frame Relay.........................................145 
   C.6         IP 146 
   C.7         ATM AAL2............................................146 
   C.8         ATM AAL1............................................148 
   C.9         Bearer capabilities.................................150 
   C.10        AAL5 properties.....................................161 
   C.11        SDP equivalents.....................................162 
   C.12        H.245...............................................164 
    
   ANNEX D     TRANSPORT OVER IP...................................165 
   D.1         Transport over IP/UDP using Application Level Framing 
                  (ALF)............................................165 
   D.1.1       Providing At-Most-Once functionality................165 
   D.1.2       Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake.....166 
   D.1.2.1     Transaction identifiers.............................166 
   D.1.2.2     Three-way handshake.................................166 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 5] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   D.1.3       Computing retransmission timers.....................167 
   D.1.4       Provisional responses...............................168 
   D.1.5       Repeating Requests, Responses and Acknowledgements..168 
   D.2         Using TCP...........................................170 
   D.2.1       Providing the At-Most-Once functionality............170 
   D.2.2       Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake.....170 
   D.2.3       Computing retransmission timers.....................170 
   D.2.4       Provisional responses...............................171 
   D.2.5       Ordering of commands................................171 
    
   ANNEX E     BASIC PACKAGES......................................172 
   E.1         Generic.............................................172 
   E.2         Base Root Package...................................174 
   E.3         Tone Generator Package..............................178 
   E.4         Tone Detection Package..............................179 
   E.5         Basic DTMF Generator Package........................182 
   E.6         DTMF detection Package..............................184 
   E.7         Call Progress Tones Generator Package...............186 
   E.8         Call Progress Tones Detection Package...............187 
   E.9         Analog Line Supervision Package.....................188 
   E.10        Basic Continuity Package............................192 
   E.11        Network Package.....................................195 
   E.12        RTP Package.........................................197 
   E.13        TDM Circuit Package.................................199 
    
   APPENDIX I  Example Call Flows..................................201 
   I.1         Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway Call.....201 
   I.1.1       Programming Residential GW Analog Line Terminations 
                   for Idle Behaviour..............................201 
   I.1.2       Collecting Originator Digits and Initiating Termination
                  .................................................203 
    
   APPENDIX II CHANGES FROM RFC XXXX [draft-ietf-megaco-3015corr 
                  -02.txt].........................................213 
    
   INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS....................................217 
   Acknowledgments.................................................218 
   Authors' Addresses..............................................219 
    
    











roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 6] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


  SCOPE 

   This document defines the protocols used between elements of a 
   physically decomposed multimedia gateway. There are no functional 
   differences from a system view between a decomposed gateway, with 
   distributed sub-components potentially on more than one physical 
   device, and a monolithic gateway such as described in Recommendation 
   H.246. This document does not define how gateways, multipoint control 
   units or interactive voice response units (IVRs) work. Instead it 
   creates a general framework that is suitable for these applications. 

   Packet network interfaces may include IP, ATM or possibly others. The 
   interfaces will support a variety of Switched Circuit Network (SCN) 
   signalling systems, including tone signalling, ISDN, ISUP, QSIG and 
   GSM. National variants of these signalling systems will be supported 
   where applicable. 

   Products claiming compliance with Version 1 of H.248.1 shall comply 
   with all of the mandatory requirements of H.248.1 originally approved 
   in 06/2000 and reissued in 03/2002.  H.248.1 (03/2002) is common text 
   with RFC xxxx [draft-ietf-megaco-3015corr-02.txt]. 

   Products claiming compliance with Version 2 of H.248.1 shall comply 
   with all of the mandatory requirements of H.248.1 approved on 
   05/2002.  H.248.1 (05/2002) is common text with this document. 

   Products shall indicate the version of the protocol in use by using 
   ServiceChangeVersion as æ1Æ to refer to RFC xxxx/H.248.1 (03/2002) 
   and æ2Æ to refer to this specification/H.248.1 (05/2002). 

    
  REFERENCES 

   The following ITU-T Recommendations and other references contain 
   provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute 
   provisions of this Recommendation. At the time of publication, the 
   editions indicated were valid. All Recommendations and other 
   references are subject to revision; all users of this Recommendation 
   are therefore encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying 
   the most recent edition of the Recommendations and other references 
   listed below. A list of the currently valid ITU-T Recommendations is 
   regularly published. 

.1   Normative references 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.225.0 (2000), Call signalling protocols and 
      media stream packetization for packet-based multimedia 
      communication systems. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 7] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.235 (1998), Security and encryption for H-
      Series (H.323 and other H.245-based) multimedia terminals. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.245 (1998), Control protocol for multimedia 
      communication. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.246 (1998), Interworking of H-series 
      multimedia terminals with H-series multimedia terminals and 
      voice/voiceband terminals on GSTN and ISDN. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.248.4 (2000), Transport over Stream Control 
      Transmission Protocol (SCTP). 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.248.5 (2000), Transport over ATM. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.248.8 (2002), H.248 Error Codes and Service 
      Change Reasons. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.323 (1999), Packet-based multimedia 
      communication systems. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.1 (1996), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer 
      (AAL) specification: Type 1 AAL. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.2 (1997), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer 
      (AAL) specification: Type 2 AAL. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.5 (1996), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer 
      (AAL) specification: Type 5 AAL. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.366.1 (1998), Segmentation and Reassembly 
      Service Specific Convergence Sublayer for the AAL type 2. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.366.2 (1999), AAL type 2 service specific 
      convergence sublayer for trunking. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.371 (2000), Traffic control and congestion 
      control in B-ISDN. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.763 (1999), Signalling System No. 7 - ISDN 
      user part formats and codes. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.765.5 (2001), Application transport 
      mechanism û Bearer independent call control (BICC). 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.931 (1998), ISDN user-network interface 
      layer 3 specification for basic call control. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 8] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2630.1 (1999), AAL type 2 signalling 
      protocol (Capability Set 1). 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931 (1995), Digital Subscriber Signalling 
      System No. 2 (DSS2) - User-Network Interface (UNI)  Layer 3 
      specification for basic call/connection control. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2941.1 (1997), Digital Subscriber 
      Signalling System No. 2 - Generic identifier transport. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2961.1 (1995), Additional signalling 
      capabilities to support traffic parameters for the tagging option 
      and the sustainable call note parameter set. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2961.2 (1997), Additional traffic 
      parameters: Support of ATM transfer capability in the broadband 
      bearer capability information element. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2965.1 (1999), Digital subscriber 
      signalling system No. 2 û Support of Quality of Service classes. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2965.2 (1999), Digital subscriber 
      signalling system No. 2 û Signalling of individual Quality of 
      Service parameters. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation V.76 (1996), Generic multiplexer using V.42 
      LAPM-based procedures. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.213 (1995), Information technology - Open 
      Systems Interconnection - Network service definition plus 
      Amendment 1 (1997), Addition of the Internet protocol address 
      format identifier. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.680 (1997), Information technology - 
      Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Specification of basic 
      notation. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.690 (1997), Information Technology û ASN.1 
      Encoding Rules: Specification of Basic Encoding Rules (BER), 
      Canonical Encoding Rules (CER) and Distinguished Encoding Rules 
      (DER). 

   -  ATM Forum (1996), ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Signalling 
      Specification - Version 4.0. 

   -  RFC 1006, ISO Transport Service on top of the TCP, Version 3. 

   -  RFC 2026, The Internet Standards Process -- Revision 3. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                 [Page 9] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   -  RFC 2119, Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement 
      Levels. 

   -  RFC 2234, Augmented BNF for Syntax Specifications: ABNF. 

   -  RFC 2327, SDP: Session Description Protocol. 

   -  RFC 2402, IP Authentication Header. 

   -  RFC 2406, IP Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). 

.2   Informative references 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation E.180/Q.35 (1998), Technical characteristics 
      of tones for the telephone service. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation G.711 (1988), Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of 
      voice frequencies. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.221 (1999), Frame structure for a 64 to 
      1920 kbit/s channel in audiovisual teleservices. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.223 (1996), Multiplexing protocol for low 
      bit rate multimedia communication. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.226 (1998), Channel aggregation protocol 
      for multilink operation on circuit-switched networks. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.724 (1998), Signalling procedures. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.764 (1999), Signalling system No. 7 û ISDN 
      user part signalling procedures. 

   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.1902.4 (2001), Bearer independent call 
      control protocol - Basic call procedures. 

   -  RFC 768, User Datagram Protocol. 

   -  RFC 791, Internet protocol. 

   -  RFC 793, Transmission control protocol. 

   -  RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). 

   -  RFC 1889, RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications. 

   -  RFC 1890, RTP Profile for Audio and Video Conferences with Minimal 
      Control. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 10] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   -  RFC 2401, Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol. 

   -  RFC 2543, SIP: Session Initiation Protocol. 

   -  RFC 2460, Internet Protocol, Version 6 (IPv6) Specification. 

   -  RFC 2805, Media Gateway Control Protocol Architecture and 
      Requirements. 

    
  DEFINITIONS 

   This document defines the following terms: 

   Access gateway: 
   A type of gateway that provides a User-Network Interface (UNI) such 
   as ISDN. 

   Descriptor: 
   A syntactic element of the protocol that groups related properties. 
   For instance, the properties of a media flow on the MG can be set by 
   the MGC by including the appropriate descriptor in a command. 

   Media Gateway (MG): 
   The media gateway converts media provided in one type of network to 
   the format required in another type of network. For example, a MG 
   could terminate bearer channels from a switched circuit network (e.g. 
   DS0s) and media streams from a packet network (e.g. RTP streams in an 
   IP network). This gateway may be capable of processing audio, video 
   and T.120 alone or in any combination, and will be capable of full 
   duplex media translations. The MG may also play audio/video messages 
   and perform other IVR functions, or may perform media conferencing. 

   Media Gateway Controller (MGC): 
   Controls the parts of the call state that pertain to connection 
   control for media channels in a MG. 

   Multipoint Control Unit (MCU): 
   An entity that controls the setup and coordination of a multi-user 
   conference that typically includes processing of audio, video and 
   data. 

   Residential gateway: 
   A gateway that interworks an analogue line to a packet network. A 
   residential gateway typically contains one or two analogue lines and 
   is located at the customer premises. 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 11] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   SCN FAS signalling gateway: 
   This function contains the SCN Signalling Interface that terminates 
   SS7, ISDN or other signalling links where the call control channel 
   and bearer channels are collocated in the same physical span. 

   SCN NFAS signalling gateway: 
   This function contains the SCN Signalling Interface that terminates 
   SS7 or other signalling links where the call control channels are 
   separated from bearer channels. 

   Stream: 
   Bidirectional media or control flow received/sent by a media gateway 
   as part of a call or conference. 

   Trunk: 
   A communication channel between two switching systems such as a DS0 
   on a T1 or E1 line. 

   Trunking gateway: 
   A gateway between SCN network and packet network that typically 
   terminates a large number of digital circuits. 

    
  ABBREVIATIONS 

   This document uses the following abbreviations: 

   ALF   Application Layer Framing 

   ATM   Asynchronous Transfer Mode 

   CAS   Channel Associated Signalling 

   DTMF  Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 

   FAS   Facility Associated Signalling 

   GSM   Global System for Mobile communications 

   GW    GateWay 

   IANA  Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (superseded by Internet 
   Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN)) 

   IP    Internet Protocol 

   ISUP  ISDN User Part 

   IVR   Interactive Voice Response 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 12] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   MG    Media Gateway 

   MGC   Media Gateway Controller 

   NFAS  Non-Facility Associated Signalling 

   PRI   Primary Rate Interface 

   PSTN  Public Switched Telephone Network  

   QoS   Quality of Service 

   RTP   Real-time Transport Protocol 

   SCN   Switched Circuit Network 

   SG    Signalling Gateway 

   SS7   Signalling System No. 7 

    
  A NOTE ON CONVENTIONS 

   According to ITU-T practice, "SHOULD" refers to a suggested but 
   optional feature or procedure.  "SHOULD" as used by the ITU-T is thus 
   a weaker requirement level than in IETF practice as defined in RFC 
   2119 and cited at the beginning of this document.  In view of this 
   difference, the present document calls out all instances of "SHOULD" 
   for review and replacement by "suggested" where that appears to be 
   the intent. 

  CONNECTION MODEL 

   The connection model for the protocol describes the logical entities, 
   or objects, within the Media Gateway that can be controlled by the 
   Media Gateway Controller. The main abstractions used in the 
   connection model are Terminations and Contexts. 

   A Termination sources and/or sinks one or more streams. In a 
   multimedia conference, a Termination can be multimedia and sources or 
   sinks multiple media streams. The media stream parameters, as well as 
   bearer parameters are encapsulated within the Termination.  

   A Context is an association between a collection of Terminations. 
   There is a special type of Context, the null Context, which contains 
   all Terminations that are not associated to any other Termination. 
   For instance, in a decomposed access gateway, all idle lines are 
   represented by Terminations in the null Context. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 13] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Following is a graphical depiction of these concepts. The diagram of 
   Figure 1 gives several examples and is not meant to be an all-
   inclusive illustration. The asterisk box in each of the Contexts 
   represents the logical association of Terminations implied by the 
   Context. 

         +------------------------------------------------------+ 
         |Media Gateway                                         | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | |Context                          +-------------+ |  | 
         | |                                 | Termination | |  | 
         | |                                 |-------------| |  | 
         | |  +-------------+             +->| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |  | Termination |   +-----+   |  |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |  |-------------|   |     |---+  +-------------+ |  | 
       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |                      |  | 
         | |  |             |   |     |---+  +-------------+ |  | 
         | |  +-------------+   +-----+   |  | Termination | |  | 
         | |                              |  |-------------| |  | 
         | |                              +->| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |                                 |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |                                 +-------------+ |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         |                                                      | 
         |                                                      | 
         |                    +------------------------------+  | 
         |   (NULL Context)   |Context                       |  | 
         |  +-------------+   |              +-------------+ |  | 
         |  | Termination |   | +-----+      | Termination | |  | 
         |  |-------------|   | |     |      |-------------| |  | 
         |  | SCN Bearer  |   | |  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         |  |   Channel   |   | |     |      |   Channel   | |  | 
         |  +-------------+   | +-----+      +-------------+ |  | 
         |                    +------------------------------+  | 
         |                                                      | 
         |                                                      | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | |Context                                          |  | 
         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  | 
         | |  | Termination |   +-----+      | Termination | |  | 
         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  | 
       <-+--->| SCN Bearer  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |  |   Channel   |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | ___________________________________________________  | 
         +------------------------------------------------------+ 
    
            Figure 1: Examples of Megaco/H.248 Connection Model 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 14] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    

   The example in Figure 2 shows an example of one way to accomplish a 
   call-waiting scenario in a decomposed access gateway, illustrating 
   the relocation of a Termination between Contexts. Terminations T1 and 
   T2 belong to Context C1 in a two-way audio call. A second audio call 
   is waiting for T1 from Termination T3. T3 is alone in Context C2. T1 
   accepts the call from T3, placing T2 on hold. This action results in 
   T1 moving into Context C2, as shown in Figure 3. 

         +------------------------------------------------------+ 
         |Media Gateway                                         | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | |Context C1                                       |  | 
         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  | 
         | |  | Term. T2    |   +-----+      | Term. T1    | |  | 
         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  | 
       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |  |             |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         |                                                      | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | |Context C2                                       |  | 
         | |                                 +-------------+ |  | 
         | |                    +-----+      | Term. T3    | |  | 
         | |                    |     |      |-------------| |  | 
         | |                    |  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |                    |     |      |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |                    +-----+      +-------------+ |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         +------------------------------------------------------+  
     
     Figure 2: Example Call Waiting Scenario / Alerting Applied to T1 

    
         +------------------------------------------------------+ 
         |Media Gateway                                         | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         | |Context C1                                       |  | 
         | |  +-------------+                                |  | 
         | |  | Term. T2    |   +-----+                      |  | 
         | |  |-------------|   |     |                      |  | 
       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |                      |  | 
         | |  |             |   |     |                      |  | 
         | |  +-------------+   +-----+                      |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         |                                                      | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 15] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         | |Context C2                                       |  | 
         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  | 
         | |  | Term. T1    |   +-----+      | Term. T3    | |  | 
         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  | 
       <-+--->| SCN Bearer  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+-> 
         | |  |   Channel   |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  | 
         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  | 
         | +-------------------------------------------------+  | 
         +------------------------------------------------------+ 
        
          Figure 3. Example Call Waiting Scenario / Answer by T1 

    

.1   Contexts 

   A Context is an association between a number of Terminations. The 
   Context describes the topology (who hears/sees whom) and the media 
   mixing and/or switching parameters if more than two Terminations are 
   involved in the association. 

   There is a special Context called the null Context. It contains 
   Terminations that are not associated to any other Termination. 
   Terminations in the null Context can have their parameters examined 
   or modified, and may have events detected on them. 

   In general, an Add command is used to add Terminations to Contexts. 
   If the MGC does not specify an existing Context to which the 
   Termination is to be added, the MG creates a new Context. A 
   Termination may be removed from a Context with a Subtract command, 
   and a Termination may be moved from one Context to another with a 
   Move command. A Termination SHALL exist in only one Context at a 
   time. 

   The maximum number of Terminations in a Context is a MG property. 
   Media gateways that offer only point-to-point connectivity might 
   allow at most two Terminations per Context. Media gateways that 
   support multipoint conferences might allow three or more Terminations 
   per Context. 

.1.1 Context attributes and descriptors 

   The attributes of Contexts are: 

   ò  ContextID. 

   ò  The topology (who hears/sees whom). 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 16] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      The topology of a Context describes the flow of media between the 
      Terminations within a Context. In contrast, the mode of a 
      Termination (send/receive/...) describes the flow of the media at 
      the ingress/egress of the media gateway. 

   ò  The priority is used for a Context in order to provide the MG with 
      information about a certain precedence handling for a Context. The 
      MGC can also use the priority to control autonomously the traffic 
      precedence in the MG in a smooth way in certain situations (e.g. 
      restart), when a lot of Contexts must be handled simultaneously. 
      Priority 0 is the lowest priority and a priority of 15 is the 
      highest priority. 

   ò  An indicator for an emergency call is also provided to allow a 
      preference handling in the MG. 

.1.2 Creating, deleting and modifying Contexts 

   The protocol can be used to (implicitly) create Contexts and modify 
   the parameter values of existing Contexts. The protocol has commands 
   to add Terminations to Contexts, subtract them from Contexts, and to 
   move Terminations between Contexts. Contexts are deleted implicitly 
   when the last remaining Termination is subtracted or moved out. 

.2   Terminations 

   A Termination is a logical entity on a MG that sources and/or sinks 
   media and/or control streams. A Termination is described by a number 
   of characterizing Properties, which are grouped in a set of 
   Descriptors that are included in commands. Terminations have unique 
   identities (TerminationIDs), assigned by the MG at the time of their 
   creation. 

   Terminations representing physical entities have a semi-permanent 
   existence. For example, a Termination representing a TDM channel 
   might exist for as long as it is provisioned in the gateway. 
   Terminations representing ephemeral information flows, such as RTP 
   flows, would usually exist only for the duration of their use. 

   Ephemeral Terminations are created by means of an Add command. They 
   are destroyed by means of a Subtract command. In contrast, when a 
   physical Termination is Added to or Subtracted from a Context, it is 
   taken from or to the null Context, respectively. 

   Terminations may have signals applied to them (see 7.1.11). 
   Terminations may be programmed to detect Events, the occurrence of 
   which can trigger notification messages to the MGC, or action by the 
   MG. Statistics may be accumulated on a Termination. Statistics are 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 17] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   reported to the MGC upon request (by means of the AuditValue command, 
   see 7.2.5) and when the Termination is subtracted from a context. 

   Multimedia gateways may process multiplexed media streams. For 
   example, Recommendation H.221 describes a frame structure for 
   multiple media streams multiplexed on a number of digital 64 kbit/s 
   channels. Such a case is handled in the connection model in the 
   following way. For every bearer channel that carries part of the 
   multiplexed streams, there is a physical or ephemeral "bearer 
   Termination". The bearer Terminations that source/sink the digital 
   channels are connected to a separate Termination called the 
   "multiplexing Termination". The multiplexing termination is an 
   ephemeral termination representing a frame-oriented session. The 
   MultiplexDescriptor for this Termination describes the multiplex used 
   (e.g. H.221 for an H.320 session) and indicates the order in which 
   the contained digital channels are assembled into a frame.  

   Multiplexing terminations may be cascades (e.g., H.226 multiplex of 
   digital channels feeding into a H.223 multiplex supporting an H.324 
   session). 

   The individual media streams carried in the session are described by 
   StreamDescriptors on the multiplexing Termination. These media 
   streams can be associated with streams sourced/sunk by Terminations 
   in the Context other than the bearer Terminations supporting the 
   multiplexing Termination.  Each bearer Termination supports only a 
   single data stream.  These data streams do not appear explicitly as 
   streams on the multiplexing Termination and they are hidden from the 
   rest of the context. 

   Figures 4, 5, 6, and 6a illustrate typical applications of the 
   multiplexing termination and Multiplex Descriptor. 

                  +-----------------------------------+ 
                  | Context     +-------+             | 
                 +----+         |       |             | 
   Circuit 1 -|--| TC1|---------+ Tmux  |             | 
              |  +----+ (Str 1) |       |  Audio    +-----+ 
              |   |             |       +-----*-----+     |----- 
              |  +----+         | H.22x | Stream 1  |     | 
   Circuit 2 -|--| TC2|---------+ multi-|           | TR1 | 
              |  +----+ (Str 1) | plex  |           |(RTP)| 
              |   |             |       |  Video    |     | 
              |  +----+         |       +-----*-----+     |----- 
   Circuit 3 -|--| TC3|---------+       | Stream 2  |     | 
              /  +----+ (Str 1) |       |           +-----+ 
             /    |             +-------+             | 
            /     +-----------------\-----------------+ 
   Audio, video, and control         \ 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 18] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   signals are carried in frames    Tmux is an ephemeral with two 
   spanning the circuits.           explicit Stream Descriptors 
                                    and a Multiplex Descriptor. 
    
      Figure 4: Multiplexed Termination Scenario û Circuit to Packet 
              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context) 

    
    
                    Context 
                  +--------------------------------------+ 
                  |       +-------+        +-------+     | 
                 +----+   |       |        |       |   +----+ 
   Circuit 1 ----| TC1|---+ Tmux1 |  Audio | Tmux2 +---| TC4|--- 
                 +----+   |       +---*----+       |   +----+ 
                  |       |       |  Str 1 |       |     | 
                 +----+   | H.22x |        | H.22x |   +----+ 
   Circuit 2 ----| TC2|---+ multi-|        | multi-+---| TC5|--- 
                 +----+   | plex  |        | plex  |   +----+ 
                  |       |       |  Video |       |     | 
                 +----+   |       +---*----+       |   +----+ 
   Circuit 3 ----| TC3|---+       |  Str 2 |       +---| TC6|--- 
                 +----+   |       |        |       |   +----+ 
                  |       +-------+        +-------+     | 
                  +-----------------\-----/--------------+ 
                                     \   / 
             Tmux1 and Tmux2 are ephemerals each with two 
   .         explicit Stream Descriptors and a Multiplex Descriptor. 
    
      Figure 5: Multiplexed Termination Scenario û Circuit to Circuit 
              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context) 

    
    
                  +-----------------------------------+ 
                  | Context     +-------+             | 
                 +----+         |       |             | 
   Circuit 1 -|--| TC1|---------+ Tmux  |             | 
              |  +----+ (Str 1) |       |  Audio    +-----+ 
              |   |             |       +-----*-----+ TR1 |----- 
              |  +----+         | H.22x | Stream 1  |(RTP)| 
   Circuit 2 -|--| TC2|---------+ multi-|           +-----+ 
              |  +----+ (Str 1) | plex  |             | 
              |   |             |       |  Video    +-----+ 
              |  +----+         |       +-----*-----+ TR2 |----- 
   Circuit 3 -|--| TC3|---------+       | Stream 2  |(RTP)| 
              /  +----+ (Str 1) |       |           +-----+ 
             /    |             +-------+             | 
            /     +-----------------\-----------------+ 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 19] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Audio, video, and control         \ 
   signals are carried in frames    Tmux is an ephemeral with two 
   spanning the circuits.           explicit Stream Descriptors 
                                    and a Multiplex Descriptor. 
    
      Figure 6: Multiplexed Termination Scenario û Single to Multiple 
                               Terminations  
              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context) 

    
    
    
            Context 
          +---------------------------------------------+ 
          |       +-------+       +-------+             | 
   Cct 1 +----+   |       |       |       | Audio     +-----+ 
     ----| TC1|---+ Tmux1 |       | Tmux2 +-----*-----| TR1 |----- 
         +----+   |       |       |       | Stream 1  |(RTP)| 
          |       |       | Data  |       |           +-----+ 
   Cct 2 +----+   | H.226 +-------+ H.223 |             | 
     ----| TC2|---+ multi-|(Str 1)| multi-| Control   +-----+ 
         +----+   | plex  |       | plex  +-----*-----+ Tctl|----- 
          |       |       |       |       | Stream 3  +-----+ 
   Cct 3 +----+   |       |       |       |             | 
     ----| TC3|---+       |       |       |           +-----+ 
         +----+   |       |       |       +-----*-----+ TR2 |----- 
          |       +-------+       |       |  Video    |(RTP)| 
          |                       +-------+ Stream 2  +-----+ 
          |                                             | 
          +---------------------------------------------+ 
        Tmux1 has a Multiplex Descriptor and a single data stream. 
        Tmux2 has a Multiplex Descriptor with a single bearer and 
        three explicit Stream Descriptors. 
    
    Figure 6a: Multiplexed Termination Scenario û Cascaded Multiplexes 
              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context) 
            Note: this figure does not appear in Rec. H.248.1. 

   ---- 

   Unlike the multiplexing terminations described in the previous 
   paragraphs, multiplexed bearer terminations, which represent 
   multiplexed bearers such as ATM AAL Type 2 bearers, carry no media 
   streams.  They are present strictly for the purpose of modeling the 
   creation and destruction of the actual bearer.  When a new 
   multiplexed bearer is to be created, an ephemeral Termination is 
   created in a Context established for this purpose.  When the 
   Termination is subtracted, the multiplexed bearer is destroyed. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 20] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.1 Termination dynamics 

   The protocol can be used to create new Terminations and to modify 
   property values of existing Terminations. These modifications include 
   the possibility of adding or removing events and/or signals. The 
   Termination properties, and events and signals are described in the 
   ensuing subclauses. An MGC can only release/modify Terminations and 
   the resources that the Termination represents, which it has 
   previously seized via e.g. the Add command. 

.2.2 TerminationIDs 

   Terminations are referenced by a TerminationID, which is an arbitrary 
   schema chosen by the MG. 

   TerminationIDs of physical Terminations are provisioned in the Media 
   Gateway. The TerminationIDs may be chosen to have structure. For 
   instance, a TerminationID may consist of trunk group and a trunk 
   within the group. 

   A wildcarding mechanism using two types of wildcards can be used with 
   TerminationIDs. The two wildcards are ALL and CHOOSE. The former is 
   used to address multiple Terminations at once, while the latter is 
   used to indicate to a media gateway that it must select a Termination 
   satisfying the partially specified TerminationID. This allows, for 
   instance, that a MGC instructs a MG to choose a circuit within a 
   trunk group. 

   When ALL is used in the TerminationID of a command, the effect is 
   identical to repeating the command with each of the matching 
   TerminationIDs. The use of ALL does not address the ROOT termination. 
   Since each of these commands may generate a response, the size of the 
   entire response may be large. If individual responses are not 
   required, a wildcard response may be requested. In such a case, a 
   single response is generated, which contains the UNION of all of the 
   individual responses which otherwise would have been generated, with 
   duplicate values suppressed. For instance, given a Termination Ta 
   with properties p1=a, p2=b and Termination Tb with properties p2=c, 
   p3=d, a UNION response would consist of a wildcarded TerminationId 
   and the sequence of properties p1=a, p2=b,c and p3=d. Wildcard 
   response may be particularly useful in the Audit commands. 

   The encoding of the wildcarding mechanism is detailed in Annexes A 
   and B. 

.2.3 Packages 

   Different types of gateways may implement Terminations that have 
   widely differing characteristics. Variations in Terminations are 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 21] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   accommodated in the protocol by allowing Terminations to have 
   optional Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics implemented by 
   MGs. 

   In order to achieve MG/MGC interoperability, such options are grouped 
   into Packages, and typically a Termination realizes a set of such 
   Packages. More information on definition of packages can be found in 
   clause 12. An MGC can audit a Termination to determine which Packages 
   it realizes. 

   Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics defined in Packages, as 
   well as parameters to them, are referenced by identifiers (Ids). 
   Identifiers are scoped. For each package, PropertyIds, EventIds, 
   SignalIds, StatisticsIds and ParameterIds have unique name spaces and 
   the same identifier may be used in each of them. Two PropertyIds in 
   different packages may also have the same identifier, etc. 

   To support a particular package the MG must support all properties, 
   signals, events and statistics defined in a package. It must also 
   support all Signal and Event parameters. The MG may support a subset 
   of the values listed in a package for a particular Property or 
   Parameter. 

   When packages are extended, the properties, events, signals and 
   statistics defined in the base package can be referred to using 
   either the extended package name or the base package name.  For 
   example, if Package A defines event e1, and Package B extends Package 
   A, then B/e1 is an event for a termination implementing Package B. By 
   definition, the MG MUST also implement the base Package, but it is 
   optional to publish the base package as an allowed interface.  If it 
   does publish  A, then A would be reported on the Package Descriptor 
   in AuditValue as well as B, and event A/e1 would be available on a 
   termination.  If the MG does not publish A, then only B/e1 would be 
   available.  If published through AuditValue, A/e1 and B/e1 are the 
   same event.  

   For improved interoperability and backward compatibility, an MG MAY 
   publish all Packages supported by its Terminations, including base 
   Packages from which extended Packages are derived.  An exception to 
   this is in cases where the base packages are expressly "Designed to 
   be extended only". 

.2.4 Termination properties and descriptors 

   Terminations have properties. The properties have unique PropertyIDs. 
   Most properties have default values, which are explicitly defined in 
   this protocol specification or in a package (see clause 12) or set by 
   provisioning. If not provisioned otherwise, the properties in all 
   descriptors except TerminationState and LocalControl default to 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 22] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   empty/"no value" when a Termination is first created or returned to 
   the null Context. The default contents of the two exceptions are 
   described in 7.1.5 and 7.1.7. 

   The provisioning of a property value in the MG will override any 
   default value, be it supplied in this protocol specification or in a 
   package.  Therefore if it is essential for the MGC to have full 
   control over the property values of a Termination, it SHOULD supply 
   explicit values when ADDing the Termination to a Context.  
   Alternatively, for a physical Termination the MGC can determine any 
   provisioned property values by auditing the Termination while it is 
   in the NULL Context. 

   There are a number of common properties for Terminations and 
   properties specific to media streams. The common properties are also 
   called the Termination state properties. For each media stream, there 
   are local properties and properties of the received and transmitted 
   flows. 

   Properties not included in the base protocol are defined in Packages. 
   These properties are referred to by a name consisting of the 
   PackageName and a PropertyId. Most properties have default values 
   described in the Package description. Properties may be read-only or 
   read/write. The possible values of a property may be audited, as can 
   their current values. For properties that are read/write, the MGC can 
   set their values. A property may be declared as "Global" which has a 
   single value shared by all Terminations realizing the package. 
   Related properties are grouped into descriptors for convenience. 

   When a Termination is added to a Context, the value of its read/write 
   properties can be set by including the appropriate descriptors as 
   parameters to the Add command. Similarly, a property of a Termination 
   in a Context may have its value changed by the Modify command. 
   Properties may also have their values changed when a Termination is 
   moved from one Context to another as a result of a Move command. In 
   some cases, descriptors are returned as output from a command. 

   In general, if a Descriptor is completely omitted from one of the 
   aforementioned Commands, the properties in that Descriptor retain 
   their prior values for the Termination(s) upon which the Command 
   acts. On the other hand, if some read/write properties are omitted 
   from a Descriptor in a Command (i.e., the Descriptor is only 
   partially specified), those properties will be reset to their default 
   values for the Termination(s) upon which the Command acts, unless the 
   package specifies other behavior. For more details, see clause 7.1 
   dealing with the individual Descriptors. 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 23] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The following table lists all of the possible descriptors and their 
   use. Not all descriptors are legal as input or output parameters to 
   every command. 

   Descriptor name   Description 

   Modem             Identifies modem type and properties when 
                      applicable(*). 

   Mux               Describes multiplex type for multimedia 
                      Terminations (e.g. H.221, H.223, H.225.0) and 
                      Terminations forming the input mux. 

   Media             A list of media stream specifications (see 
                      7.1.4). 

   TerminationState  Properties of a Termination (which can be 
                      defined in Packages) that are not stream 
                      specific. 

   Stream            A list of remote/local/localControl 
                      descriptors for a single stream. 

   Local             Contains properties that specify the media 
                      flows that the MG receives from the remote 
                      entity. 

   Remote            Contains properties that specify the media 
                      flows that the MG sends to the remote entity. 

   LocalControl      Contains properties (which can be defined in 
                      packages) that are of interest between the MG 
                      and the MGC. 

   Events            Describes events to be detected by the MG and 
                      what to do when an event is detected. 

   EventBuffer       Describes events to be detected by the MG when 
                      Event Buffering is active. 

   Signals           Describes signals (see 7.1.11) applied  to  
                      Terminations. 

   Audit             In Audit commands, identifies which 
                      information is desired. 

   Packages          In AuditValue, returns a list of Packages 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 24] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Descriptor name   Description 

                      realized by Termination. 

   DigitMap          Defines patterns against which sequences of a 
                      specified set of events  are to be matched so 
                      they can be reported as a group rather than 
                      singly. 

   ServiceChange     In ServiceChange, what, why service change 
                      occurred, etc.  

   ObservedEvents    In Notify or AuditValue, report of events 
                      observed. 

   Statistics        In Subtract and Audit, report of Statistics 
                      kept on a Termination. 

   Topology          Specifies flow directions between Terminations 
                      in a Context. 

   Error             Contains an error code and optionally error 
                      text; it may occur in command replies and in 
                      Notify requests. 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in Megaco v2/H.248.1 
   (05/2002). 

    

.2.5 Root Termination 

   Occasionally, a command must refer to the gateway as an entity in 
   itself, rather than a Termination within it. A special TerminationID, 
   "Root" is reserved for this purpose. Packages may be defined on Root. 
   Root thus may have properties, events, signals and statistics. 
   Accordingly, the root TerminationID may appear in: 

   ò  a Modify command - to change a property, send a signal or set an 
      event 

   ò  a Notify command - to report an event 

   ò  an AuditValue return - to examine the values of properties and 
      statistics implemented on root 

   ò  an AuditCapability - to determine what properties of root are 
      implemented 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 25] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ò  a ServiceChange - to declare the gateway in or out of service. 

   Any other use of the root TerminationID is an error. Error code 410 û 
   "Incorrect identifier" shall be returned in these cases. 

    
  COMMANDS 

   The protocol provides commands for manipulating the logical entities 
   of the protocol connection model, Contexts and Terminations. Commands 
   provide control at the finest level of granularity supported by the 
   protocol. For example, Commands exist to add Terminations to a 
   Context, modify Terminations, subtract Terminations from a Context, 
   and audit properties of Contexts or Terminations. Commands provide 
   for complete control of the properties of Contexts and Terminations. 
   This includes specifying which events a Termination is to report, 
   which signals/actions are to be applied to a Termination and 
   specifying the topology of a Context (who hears/sees whom). 

   Most commands are for the specific use of the Media Gateway 
   Controller as command initiator in controlling Media Gateways as 
   command responders. The exceptions are the Notify and ServiceChange 
   commands: Notify is sent from Media Gateway to Media Gateway 
   Controller, and ServiceChange may be sent by either entity. Below is 
   an overview of the commands; they are explained in more detail in 
   7.2. 

   1) Add: The Add command adds a Termination to a Context. The Add 
      command on the first Termination in a Context is used to create a 
      Context. 

   2) Modify: The Modify command modifies the properties, events and 
      signals of a Termination. 

   3) Subtract: The Subtract command disconnects a Termination from its 
      Context and returns statistics on the Termination's participation 
      in the Context. The Subtract command on the last Termination in a 
      Context deletes the Context. 

   4) Move: The Move command atomically moves a Termination to another 
      Context. 

   5) AuditValue: The AuditValue command returns the current state of 
      properties, events, signals and statistics of Terminations. 

   6) AuditCapabilities: The AuditCapabilities command returns all the 
      possible values for Termination properties, events and signals 
      allowed by the Media Gateway. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 26] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   7) Notify: The Notify command allows the Media Gateway to inform the 
      Media Gateway Controller of the occurrence of events in the Media 
      Gateway. 

   8) ServiceChange: The ServiceChange command allows the Media Gateway 
      to notify the Media Gateway Controller that a Termination or group 
      of Terminations is about to be taken out of service or has just 
      been returned to service. ServiceChange is also used by the MG to 
      announce its availability to a MGC (registration), and to notify 
      the MGC of impending or completed restart of the MG. The MGC may 
      announce a handover to the MG by sending it a ServiceChange 
      command. The MGC may also use ServiceChange to instruct the MG to 
      take a Termination or group of Terminations in or out of service. 

   These commands are detailed in 7.2.1 through 7.2.8. 

.1   Descriptors 

   The parameters to a command are termed Descriptors. A descriptor 
   consists of a name and a list of items. Some items may have values. 
   Many Commands share common descriptors. This subclause enumerates 
   these descriptors. Descriptors may be returned as output from a 
   command. In any such return of descriptor contents, an empty 
   descriptor is represented by its name unaccompanied by any list. 
   Parameters and parameter usage specific to a given Command type are 
   described in the subclause that describes the Command.  

.1.1 Specifying parameters 

   Command parameters are structured into a number of descriptors. In 
   general, the text format of descriptors is 
      DescriptorName=<someID>{parm=value, parm=value, ...}. 

   Parameters may be fully specified, overspecified or underspecified: 

   1) Fully specified parameters have a single, unambiguous value that 
      the command initiator is instructing the command responder to use 
      for the specified parameter. 

   2) Underspecified parameters, using the CHOOSE value, allow the 
      command responder to choose any value it can support. 

   3) Overspecified parameters have a list of potential values. The list 
      order specifies the command initiator's order of preference of 
      selection. The command responder chooses one value from the 
      offered list and returns that value to the command initiator. 

   If a required descriptor other than the Audit descriptor is 
   unspecified (i.e. entirely absent) from a command, the previous 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 27] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   values set in that descriptor for that Termination, if any, are 
   retained. In commands other than Subtract, a missing Audit descriptor 
   is equivalent to an empty Audit descriptor. The Behaviour of the MG 
   with respect to unspecified parameters within a descriptor varies 
   with the descriptor concerned, as indicated in succeeding subclauses. 
   Whenever a parameter is underspecified or overspecified, the 
   descriptor containing the value chosen by the responder is included 
   as output from the command. 

   Each command specifies the TerminationId the command operates on. 
   This TerminationId may be "wildcarded". When the TerminationId of a 
   command is wildcarded, the effect shall be as if the command was 
   repeated with each of the TerminationIds matched. 

.1.2 Modem descriptor 

   The Modem descriptor specifies the modem type and parameters, if any, 
   required for use in e.g. H.324 and text conversation. The descriptor 
   includes the following modem types: V.18, V.22, V.22 bis, V.32, V.32 
   bis, V.34, V.90, V.91, Synchronous ISDN, and allows for extensions. 
   By default, no Modem descriptor is present in a Termination. 

   Use of the ModemDescriptor is deprecated in Megaco v2/H.248.1 
   (05/2002) and subsequent versions. This means that the 
   ModemDescriptor shall not be included as part of transmitted content 
   and if received shall either be ignored or processed at the option of 
   the implementation. Modem type is to be specified as an attribute of 
   data streams in LocalDescriptor and RemoteDescriptor. 

.1.3 Multiplex descriptor 

   In multimedia calls, a number of media streams are carried on a 
   (possibly different) number of bearers. The multiplex descriptor 
   associates the media and the bearers. The descriptor includes the 
   multiplex type: 

   ò  H.221; 
   ò  H.223; 
   ò  H.226; 
   ò  V.76; 
   ò  Nx64K; 
   ò  possible extensions, 

   and a set of TerminationIDs representing the multiplexed bearers, in 
   order. For example: 

      Mux = H.221{ MyT3/1/2, MyT3/2/13, MyT3/3/6, MyT3/21/22} 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 28] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The Nx64K Multiplex type implements the Nx64K service (e.g. as 
   defined by Q.931 Information Transfer Rate or Q.763 Transmission 
   Medium Requirement). On the context side it supports a single stream 
   of wideband data.  When a bearer termination is added implicitly to a 
   context as a result of the creation of an Nx64K multiplexing 
   termination, the streamDescriptor for the bearer termination shall 
   take on the same values as the streamDescriptor defined for the 
   Multiplex termination, except that the bearer termination bandwidth 
   shall be 64 kilobits per second. 

.1.4 Media descriptor 

   The Media descriptor specifies the parameters for all the media 
   streams. These parameters are structured into two descriptors: a 
   TerminationState descriptor, which specifies the properties of a 
   Termination that are not stream dependent, and one or more Stream 
   descriptors each of which describes a single media stream. 

   A stream is identified by a StreamID. The StreamID is used to link 
   the streams in a Context that belong together. Multiple streams 
   exiting a Termination shall be synchronized with each other. Within 
   the Stream descriptor, there are up to three subsidiary descriptors: 
   LocalControl, Local, and Remote. The relationship between these 
   descriptors is thus: 

   Media descriptor 
      TerminationState Descriptor 
      Stream descriptor 
         LocalControl descriptor 
         Local descriptor 
         Remote descriptor 

   As a convenience, LocalControl, Local, or Remote descriptors may be 
   included in the Media descriptor without an enclosing Stream 
   descriptor. In this case, the StreamID is assumed to be 1. 

.1.5 TerminationState descriptor 

   The TerminationState descriptor contains the ServiceStates property, 
   the EventBufferControl property and properties of a Termination 
   (defined in Packages) that are not stream specific. 

   The ServiceStates property describes the overall state of the 
   Termination (not stream specific). A Termination can be in one of the 
   following states: "test", "out of service", or "in service". The 
   "test" state indicates that the Termination is being tested. The 
   state "out of service" indicates that the Termination cannot be used 
   for traffic. The state "in service" indicates that a Termination can 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 29] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   be used or is being used for normal traffic. "in service" is the 
   default state. 

   Values assigned to Properties may be simple values 
   (integer/string/enumeration) or may be underspecified, where more 
   than one value is supplied and the MG may make a choice: 

   ò  Alternative Values û multiple values in a list, one of which must 
      be selected 

   ò  Ranges û minimum and maximum values, any value between min and max 
      must be selected, boundary values included 

   ò  Greater Than/Less Than û value must be greater/less than specified 
      value 

   ò  CHOOSE Wildcard û the MG chooses from the allowed values for the 
      property 

   The EventBufferControl property specifies whether events are buffered 
   following detection of an event in the Events descriptor, or 
   processed immediately. See 7.1.9 for details. 

.1.6 Stream descriptor 

   A Stream descriptor specifies the parameters of a single 
   bidirectional stream. These parameters are structured into three 
   descriptors: one that contains Termination properties specific to a 
   stream and one each for local and remote flows. The Stream Descriptor 
   includes a StreamID which identifies the stream. Streams are created 
   by specifying a new StreamID on one of the Terminations in a Context. 
   A stream is deleted by setting empty Local and Remote descriptors for 
   the stream with ReserveGroup and ReserveValue in LocalControl set to 
   "false" on all Terminations in the Context that previously supported 
   that stream. 

   StreamIDs are of local significance between MGC and MG and they are 
   assigned by the MGC. Within a Context, StreamID is a means by which 
   to indicate which media flows are interconnected: streams with the 
   same StreamID are connected. 

   If a Termination is moved from one Context to another, the effect on 
   the Context to which the Termination is moved is the same as in the 
   case that a new Termination were added with the same StreamIDs as the 
   moved Termination. 






roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 30] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.1.7 LocalControl descriptor 

   The LocalControl descriptor contains the Mode property, the 
   ReserveGroup and ReserveValue properties and properties of a 
   Termination (defined in Packages) that are stream specific, and are 
   of interest between the MG and the MGC. Values of properties may be 
   specified as in 7.1.1. 

   The allowed values for the mode property are send-only, receive-only, 
   send/receive, inactive and loop-back. "Send" and "receive" are with 
   respect to the exterior of the Context, so that, for example, a 
   stream set to mode=sendOnly does not pass received media into the 
   Context. The default value for the mode property is "Inactive". 
   Signals and Events are not affected by mode. 

   The boolean-valued Reserve properties, ReserveValue and ReserveGroup, 
   of a Termination indicate what the MG is expected to do when it 
   receives a Local and/or Remote descriptor.  

   If the value of a Reserve property is True, the MG SHALL reserve 
   resources for all alternatives specified in the Local and/or Remote 
   descriptors for which it currently has resources available. It SHALL 
   respond with the alternatives for which it reserves resources. If it 
   cannot not support any of the alternatives, it SHALL respond with a 
   reply to the MGC that contains empty Local and/or Remote descriptors. 
   If media begins to flow while more than a single alternative is 
   reserved, media packets may be sent/received on any of the 
   alternatives and must be processed, although only a single 
   alternative may be active at any given time. 

   If the value of a Reserve property is False, the MG SHALL choose one 
   of the alternatives specified in the Local descriptor (if present) 
   and one of the alternatives specified in the Remote descriptor (if 
   present). If the MG has not yet reserved resources to support the 
   selected alternative, it SHALL reserve the resources. If, on the 
   other hand, it already reserved resources for the Termination 
   addressed (because of a prior exchange with ReserveValue and/or 
   ReserveGroup equal to True), it SHALL release any excess resources it 
   reserved previously. Finally, the MG shall send a reply to the MGC 
   containing the alternatives for the Local and/or Remote descriptor 
   that it selected. If the MG does not have sufficient resources to 
   support any of the alternatives specified, is SHALL respond with 
   Error 510 - "Insufficient resources". 

   The default value of ReserveValue and ReserveGroup is False. More 
   information on the use of the two Reserve properties is provided in 
   7.1.8. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 31] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   A new setting of the LocalControl Descriptor completely replaces the 
   previous setting of that descriptor in the MG. Thus, to retain 
   information from the previous setting, the MGC must include that 
   information in the new setting. If the MGC wishes to delete some 
   information from the existing descriptor, it merely resends the 
   descriptor (in a Modify command) with the unwanted information 
   stripped out. 

.1.8 Local and Remote descriptors 

   The MGC uses Local and Remote descriptors to reserve and commit MG 
   resources for media decoding and encoding for the given Stream(s) and 
   Termination to which they apply. The MG includes these descriptors in 
   its response to indicate what it is actually prepared to support. The 
   MG SHALL include additional properties and their values in its 
   response if these properties are mandatory yet not present in the 
   requests made by the MGC (e.g. by specifying detailed video encoding 
   parameters where the MGC only specified the payload type). 

   Local refers to the media received by the MG and Remote refers to the 
   media sent by the MG. 

   When text encoding the protocol, the descriptors consist of session 
   descriptions as defined in SDP (RFC 2327). In session descriptions 
   sent from the MGC to the MG, the following exceptions to the syntax 
   of RFC 2327 are allowed: 

   ò  the "s=", "t=" and "o=" lines are optional; 

   ò  the use of CHOOSE is allowed in place of a single parameter value; 
      and 

   ò  the use of alternatives is allowed in place of a single parameter 
      value. 

   A Stream Descriptor specifies a single bi-directional media stream 
   and so a single session description MUST NOT include more than one 
   media description ("m=" line). A Stream Descriptor may contain 
   additional session descriptions as alternatives.  Each media stream 
   for a termination must appear in distinct Stream Descriptors. When 
   multiple session descriptions are provided in one descriptor, the 
   "v=" lines are required as delimiters; otherwise they are optional in 
   session descriptions sent to the MG. Implementations shall accept 
   session descriptions that are fully conformant to RFC 2327. When 
   binary encoding the protocol the descriptor consists of groups of 
   properties (tag-value pairs) as specified in Annex C. Each such group 
   may contain the parameters of a session description. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 32] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Below, the semantics of the Local and Remote descriptors are 
   specified in detail. The specification consists of two parts. The 
   first part specifies the interpretation of the contents of the 
   descriptor. The second part specifies the actions the MG must take 
   upon receiving the Local and Remote descriptors. The actions to be 
   taken by the MG depend on the values of the ReserveValue and 
   ReserveGroup properties of the LocalControl descriptor. 

   Either the Local or the Remote descriptor or both may be: 

   ò  unspecified (i.e. absent); 

   ò  empty; 

   ò  underspecified through use of CHOOSE in a property value; 

   ò  fully specified; or 

   ò  overspecified through presentation of multiple groups of 
      properties and possibly multiple property values in one or more of 
      these groups. 

   Where the descriptors have been passed from the MGC to the MG, they 
   are interpreted according to the rules given in 7.1.1, with the 
   following additional comments for clarification: 

   a) An unspecified Local or Remote descriptor is considered to be a 
      missing mandatory parameter. It requires the MG to use whatever 
      was last specified for that descriptor. It is possible that there 
      was no previously specified value, in which case the descriptor 
      concerned is ignored in further processing of the command. 

   b) An empty Local (Remote) descriptor in a message from the MGC 
      signifies a request to release any resources reserved for the 
      media flow received (sent). 

   c) If multiple groups of properties are present in a Local or Remote 
      descriptor or multiple values within a group, the order of 
      preference is descending. 

   d) Underspecified or overspecified properties within a group of 
      properties sent by the MGC are requests for the MG to choose one 
      or more values which it can support for each of those properties. 
      In case of an overspecified property, the list of values is in 
      descending order of preference. 

   Subject to the above rules, subsequent action depends on the values 
   of the ReserveValue and ReserveGroup properties in LocalControl. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 33] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   If ReserveGroup is True, the MG reserves the resources required to 
   support any of the requested property group alternatives that it can 
   currently support. If ReserveValue is True, the MG reserves the 
   resources required to support any of the requested property value 
   alternatives that it can currently support. 

   NOTE û If a Local or Remote descriptor contains multiple groups of 
   properties, and ReserveGroup is True, then the MG is requested to 
   reserve resources so that it can decode or encode the media stream 
   according to any of the alternatives. For instance, if the Local 
   descriptor contains two groups of properties, one specifying 
   packetized G.711 A-law audio and the other G.723.1 audio, the MG 
   reserves resources so that it can decode one audio stream encoded in 
   either G.711 A-law format or G.723.1 format. The MG does not have to 
   reserve resources to decode two audio streams simultaneously, one 
   encoded in G.711 A-law and one in G.723.1. The intention for the use 
   of ReserveValue is analogous. 

   If ReserveGroup is true or ReserveValue is True, then the following 
   rules apply: 

   ò  If the MG has insufficient resources to support all alternatives 
      requested by the MGC and the MGC requested resources in both Local 
      and Remote, the MG SHOULD reserve resources to support at least 
      one alternative each within Local and Remote. 

   ò  If the MG has insufficient resources to support at least one 
      alternative within a Local (Remote) descriptor received from the 
      MGC, it shall return an empty Local (Remote) in response. 

   ò  In its response to the MGC, when the MGC included Local and Remote 
      descriptors, the MG SHALL include Local and Remote descriptors for 
      all groups of properties and property values it reserved resources 
      for. If the MG is incapable of supporting at least one of the 
      alternatives within the Local (Remote) descriptor received from 
      the MGC, it SHALL return an empty Local (Remote) descriptor. 

   ò  If the Mode property of the LocalControl descriptor is RecvOnly, 
      SendRecv, or LoopBack, the MG must be prepared to receive media 
      encoded according to any of the alternatives included in its 
      response to the MGC. 

   If ReserveGroup is False and ReserveValue is False, then the MG 
   SHOULD apply the following rules to resolve Local and Remote to a 
   single alternative each: 

   ò  The MG chooses the first alternative in Local for which it is able 
      to support at least one alternative in Remote. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 34] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ò  If the MG is unable to support at least one Local and one Remote 
      alternative, it returns Error 510 - "Insufficient resources". 

   ò  The MG returns its selected alternative in each of Local and 
      Remote. 

   A new setting of a Local or Remote descriptor completely replaces the 
   previous setting of that descriptor in the MG. Thus, to retain 
   information from the previous setting, the MGC must include that 
   information in the new setting. If the MGC wishes to delete some 
   information from the existing descriptor, it merely resends the 
   descriptor (in a Modify command) with the unwanted information 
   stripped out. 

.1.9 Events descriptor 

   The EventsDescriptor parameter contains a RequestIdentifier and a 
   list of events that the Media Gateway is requested to detect and 
   report. The RequestIdentifier is used to correlate the request with 
   the notifications that it may trigger. Requested events include, for 
   example, fax tones, continuity test results, and on-hook and off-hook 
   transitions. The RequestIdentifier is omitted if the EventsDescriptor 
   is empty (i.e. no events are specified). 

   Each event in the descriptor contains the Event name, an optional 
   streamID, an optional KeepActive flag, and optional parameters. The 
   Event name consists of a Package Name (where the event is defined) 
   and an EventID. The ALL wildcard may be used for the EventID, 
   indicating that all events from the specified package have to be 
   detected. The default streamID is 0, indicating that the event to be 
   detected is not related to a particular media stream. Events can have 
   parameters. This allows a single event description to have some 
   variation in meaning without creating large numbers of individual 
   events. Further event parameters are defined in the package. 

   If a digit map completion event is present or implied in the 
   EventsDescriptor, the EventDM parameter is used to carry either the 
   name or the value of the associated digit map. See 7.1.14 for further 
   details. 

   When an event is processed against the contents of an active Events 
   Descriptor and found to be present in that descriptor ("recognized"), 
   the default action of the MG is to send a Notify command to the MGC. 
   Notification may be deferred if the event is absorbed into the 
   current dial string of an active digit map (see 7.1.14). Any other 
   action is for further study. Moreover, event recognition may cause 
   currently active signals to stop, or may cause the current Events 
   and/or Signals descriptor to be replaced, as described at the end of 
   this subclause. Unless the Events Descriptor is replaced by another 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 35] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Events Descriptor, it remains active after an event has been 
   recognized. 

   If the value of the EventBufferControl property equals LockStep, 
   following detection of such an event, normal handling of events is 
   suspended. Any event which is subsequently detected and occurs in the 
   EventBuffer descriptor is added to the end of the EventBuffer (a FIFO 
   queue), along with the time that it was detected. The MG SHALL wait 
   for a new EventsDescriptor to be loaded. A new EventsDescriptor can 
   be loaded either as the result of receiving a command with a new 
   EventsDescriptor, or by activating an embedded EventsDescriptor. 

   If EventBufferControl equals Off, the MG continues processing based 
   on the active EventsDescriptor. 

   In the case of an embedded EventsDescriptor being activated, the MG 
   continues event processing based on the newly activated 
   EventsDescriptor. 

   NOTE 1 - For purposes of EventBuffer handling, activation of an 
   embedded EventsDescriptor is equivalent to receipt of a new 
   EventsDescriptor. 

   When the MG receives a command with a new EventsDescriptor, one or 
   more events may have been buffered in the EventBuffer in the MG. The 
   value of EventBufferControl then determines how the MG treats such 
   buffered events. 

     
   Case 1 

   If EventBufferControl equals LockStep and the MG receives a new 
   EventsDescriptor, it will check the FIFO EventBuffer and take the 
   following actions: 

   1) If the EventBuffer is empty, the MG waits for detection of events 
      based on the new EventsDescriptor. 

   2) If the EventBuffer is non-empty, the MG processes the FIFO queue 
      starting with the first event: 

      a) If the event in the queue is in the events listed in the new 
         EventsDescriptor, the MG acts on the event and removes the 
         event from the EventBuffer. The time stamp of the Notify shall 
         be the time the event was actually detected. The MG then waits 
         for a new EventsDescriptor. While waiting for a new 
         EventsDescriptor, any events detected that appear in the 
         EventsBufferDescriptor will be placed in the EventBuffer. When 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 36] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         a new EventsDescriptor is received, the event processing will 
         repeat from step 1. 

      b) If the event is not in the new EventsDescriptor, the MG SHALL 
         discard the event and repeat from step 1. 

    
   Case 2 

   If EventBufferControl equals Off and the MG receives a new 
   EventsDescriptor, it processes new events with the new 
   EventsDescriptor. 

   If the MG receives a command instructing it to set the value of 
   EventBufferControl to Off, all events in the EventBuffer SHALL be 
   discarded. 

   The MG may report several events in a single Transaction as long as 
   this does not unnecessarily delay the reporting of individual events. 

   For procedures regarding transmitting the Notify command, refer to 
   the appropriate annex or Recommendation of the H.248 sub-series for 
   specific transport considerations. 

   The default value of EventBufferControl is Off. 

   NOTE 2 û Since the EventBufferControl property is in the 
   TerminationStateDescriptor, the MG might receive a command that 
   changes the EventBufferControl property and does not include an 
   EventsDescriptor. 

   Normally, recognition of an event shall cause any active signals to 
   stop. When KeepActive is specified in the event, the MG shall not 
   interrupt any signals active on the Termination on which the event is 
   detected. 

   An event can include an Embedded Signals descriptor and/or an 
   Embedded Events descriptor which, if present, replaces the current 
   Signals/Events descriptor when the event is recognized. It is 
   possible, for example, to specify that the dial-tone Signal be 
   generated when an off-hook Event is recognized, or that the dial-tone 
   Signal be stopped when a digit is recognized. A media gateway 
   controller shall not send EventsDescriptors with an event both marked 
   KeepActive and containing an embedded SignalsDescriptor. 

   Only one level of embedding is permitted. An embedded 
   EventsDescriptor SHALL NOT contain another embedded EventsDescriptor; 
   an embedded EventsDescriptor MAY contain an embedded 
   SignalsDescriptor. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 37] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   An EventsDescriptor received by a media gateway replaces any previous 
   Events descriptor. Event notification in process shall complete, and 
   events detected after the command containing the new EventsDescriptor 
   executes, shall be processed according to the new EventsDescriptor. 

   An empty Events Descriptor disables all event recognition and 
   reporting.  An empty EventBuffer Descriptor clears the EventBuffer 
   and disables all event accumulation in LockStep mode: the only events 
   reported will be those occurring while an Events Descriptor is 
   active.  If an empty Events Descriptor is activated while the 
   Termination is operating in LockStep mode, the events buffer is 
   immediately cleared. 

.1.10   EventBuffer descriptor 

   The EventBuffer descriptor contains a list of events, with their 
   parameters if any, that the MG is requested to detect and buffer when 
   EventBufferControl equals LockStep (see 7.1.9). 

.1.11   Signals descriptor 

   Signals are MG generated media such as tones and announcements as 
   well as bearer-related signals such as hookswitch. More complex 
   signals may include a sequence of such simple signals interspersed 
   with and conditioned upon the receipt and analysis of media or 
   bearer-related signals. Examples include echoing of received data as 
   in Continuity Test package.  Signals may also request preparation of 
   media content for future signals. 

   A SignalsDescriptor is a parameter that contains the set of signals 
   that the Media Gateway is asked to apply to a Termination. A 
   SignalsDescriptor contains a number of signals and/or sequential 
   signal lists. A SignalsDescriptor may contain zero signals and 
   sequential signal lists. Support of sequential signal lists is 
   optional. 

   Signals are defined in packages. Signals shall be named with a 
   Package name (in which the signal is defined) and a SignalID. No 
   wildcard shall be used in the SignalID. Signals that occur in a 
   SignalsDescriptor have an optional StreamID parameter (default is 0, 
   to indicate that the signal is not related to a particular media 
   stream), an optional signal type (see below), an optional duration 
   and possibly parameters defined in the package that defines the 
   signal. This allows a single signal to have some variation in 
   meaning, obviating the need to create large numbers of individual 
   signals. 

   Finally, the optional parameter "notifyCompletion" allows a MGC to 
   indicate that it wishes to be notified when the signal finishes 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 38] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   playout. The possible cases are that the signal timed out (or 
   otherwise completed on its own), that it was interrupted by an event, 
   that it was halted when a Signals descriptor was replaced, or that it 
   stopped or never started for other reasons. If the notifyCompletion 
   parameter is not included in a Signals descriptor, notification is 
   generated only if the signal stopped or was never started for other 
   reasons. For reporting to occur, the signal completion event (see 
   E.1.2) must be enabled in the currently active Events descriptor. 

   The duration is an integer value that is expressed in hundredths of a 
   second. 

   There are three types of signals: 

   ò  on/off û the signal lasts until it is turned off; 

   ò  timeout û the signal lasts until it is turned off or a specific 
      period of time elapses; 

   ò  brief û the signal will stop on its own unless a new Signals 
      descriptor is applied that causes it to stop; no timeout value is 
      needed. 

   If a signal of default type other than TO has its type overridden to 
   type TO in the Signals descriptor, the duration parameter must be 
   present. 

   If the signal type is specified in a SignalsDescriptor, it overrides 
   the default signal type (see 12.1.4). If duration is specified for an 
   on/off signal, it SHALL be ignored. 

   A sequential signal list consists of a signal list identifier and a 
   sequence of signals to be played sequentially. Only the trailing 
   element of the sequence of signals in a sequential signal list may be 
   an on/off signal. The duration of a sequential signal list is the sum 
   of the durations of the signals it contains.  

   Multiple signals and sequential signal lists in the same 
   SignalsDescriptor shall be played simultaneously. 

   Signals are defined as proceeding from the Termination towards the 
   exterior of the Context unless otherwise specified in a package. When 
   the same Signal is applied to multiple Terminations within one 
   Transaction, the MG SHOULD consider using the same resource to 
   generate these Signals. 

   Production of a Signal on a Termination is stopped by application of 
   a new SignalsDescriptor, or detection of an Event on the Termination 
   (see 7.1.9). 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 39] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   A new SignalsDescriptor replaces any existing SignalsDescriptor. Any 
   signals applied to the Termination not in the replacement descriptor 
   shall be stopped, and new signals are applied, except as follows. 
   Signals present in the replacement descriptor and containing the 
   KeepActive flagshall be continued if they are currently playing and 
   have not already completed. If a replacement signal descriptor 
   contains a signal that is not currently playing and contains the 
   KeepActive flag, that signal SHALL be ignored. If the replacement 
   descriptor contains a sequential signal list with the same identifier 
   as the existing descriptor, then 

   ò  the signal type and sequence of signals in the sequential signal 
      list in the replacement descriptor shall be ignored; and 

   ò  the playing of the signals in the sequential signal list in the 
      existing descriptor shall not be interrupted. 

.1.12   Audit descriptor 

   The Audit descriptor specifies what information is to be audited. The 
   Audit descriptor specifies the list of descriptors and-or individual 
   properties to be returned. Audit may be used in any command to force 
   the return of any descriptor containing the current values of its 
   properties, events, signals and statistics even if that descriptor 
   was not present in the command, or had no underspecified parameters. 
   Possible items in the Audit descriptor are: 

   -  Modem (Deprecated, see clause 7.1.2) 
   -  Mux  
   -  Events  
   -  Media 
   -  Signals  
   -  ObservedEvents 
   -  DigitMap 
   -  Statistics 
   -  Packages 
   -  EventBuffer 
   -  Individual Audit Items: 
      -  Media Properties 
      -  Events 
      -  Event Buffer 
      -  Signals, Signal Lists 
      -  Digit Maps 
      -  Statistics 
      -  Packages 

   Audit may be empty, in which case, no descriptors are returned. This 
   is useful in Subtract, to inhibit return of statistics, especially 
   when using wildcard. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 40] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.1.13   ServiceChange descriptor 

   The ServiceChangeDescriptor contains the following parameters: 

   ò  ServiceChangeMethod  
   ò  ServiceChangeReason  
   ò  ServiceChangeAddress  
   ò  ServiceChangeDelay 
   ò  ServiceChangeProfile 
   ò  ServiceChangeVersion  
   ò  ServiceChangeMGCId 
   ò  TimeStamp 
   ò  Extension 

   See 7.2.8. 

.1.14   DigitMap descriptor 

.1.14.1 DigitMap definition, creation, modification and deletion 

   A DigitMap is a dialing plan resident in the Media Gateway used for 
   detecting and reporting digit events received on a Termination. The 
   DigitMap descriptor contains a DigitMap name and the DigitMap to be 
   assigned. A digit map may be preloaded into the MG by management 
   action and referenced by name in an EventsDescriptor, may be defined 
   dynamically and subsequently referenced by name, or the actual 
   digitmap itself may be specified in the EventsDescriptor. It is 
   permissible for a digit map completion event within an Events 
   descriptor to refer by name to a DigitMap which is defined by a 
   DigitMap descriptor within the same command, regardless of the 
   transmitted order of the respective descriptors. 

   DigitMaps defined in a DigitMapDescriptor can occur in any of the 
   standard Termination manipulation Commands of the protocol. A 
   DigitMap, once defined, can be used on all Terminations specified by 
   the (possibly wildcarded) TerminationID in such a command. DigitMaps 
   defined on the root Termination are global and can be used on every 
   Termination in the MG, provided that a DigitMap with the same name 
   has not been defined on the given Termination. When a DigitMap is 
   defined dynamically in a DigitMap descriptor: 

   ò  A new DigitMap is created by specifying a name that is not yet 
      defined. The value shall be present. 

   ò  A DigitMap value is updated by supplying a new value for a name 
      that is already defined. Terminations presently using the digitmap 
      shall continue to use the old definition; subsequent 
      EventsDescriptors specifying the name, including any 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 41] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      EventsDescriptor in the command containing the DigitMap 
      descriptor, shall use the new one. 

   ò  A DigitMap is deleted by supplying an empty value for a name that 
      is already defined. Terminations presently using the digitmap 
      shall continue to use the old definition. 

.1.14.2 DigitMap Timers 

   The collection of digits according to a DigitMap may be protected by 
   three timers, viz. a start timer (T), short timer (S), and long timer 
   (L). 

   1) The start timer (T) is used prior to any digits having been 
      dialed. If the start timer is overridden with the value set to 
      zero (T=0), then the start timer shall be disabled.  This implies 
      that the MG will wait indefinitely for digits. 

   2) If the Media Gateway can determine that at least one more digit is 
      needed for a digit string to match any of the allowed patterns in 
      the digit map, then the interdigit timer value SHOULD be set to a 
      long (L) duration (e.g. 16 seconds). 

   3) If the digit string has matched one of the patterns in a digit 
      map, but it is possible that more digits could be received which 
      would cause a match with a different pattern, then instead of 
      reporting the match immediately, the MG must apply the short timer 
      (S) and wait for more digits. 

   The timers are configurable parameters to a DigitMap. Default values 
   of these timers SHOULD be provisioned on the MG, but can be 
   overridden by values specified within the DigitMap. 

.1.14.3 DigitMap Syntax 

   The formal syntax of the digit map is described by the DigitMap rule 
   in the formal syntax description of the protocol (see Annex A and 
   Annex B). A DigitMap, according to this syntax, is defined either by 
   a string or by a list of strings. Each string in the list is an 
   alternative event sequence, specified either as a sequence of digit 
   map symbols or as a regular expression of digit map symbols. These 
   digit map symbols, the digits "0" through "9" and letters "A" through 
   a maximum value depending on the signalling system concerned, but 
   never exceeding "K", correspond to specified events within a package 
   which has been designated in the Events descriptor on the Termination 
   to which the digit map is being applied. (The mapping between events 
   and digit map symbols is defined in the documentation for packages 
   associated with channel-associated signalling systems such as DTMF, 
   MF, or R2. Digits "0" through "9" MUST be mapped to the corresponding 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 42] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   digit events within the signalling system concerned. Letters SHOULD 
   be allocated in logical fashion, facilitating the use of range 
   notation for alternative events.) 

   The letter "x" is used as a wildcard, designating any event 
   corresponding to symbols in the range "0"-"9". The string may also 
   contain explicit ranges and, more generally, explicit sets of 
   symbols, designating alternative events any one of which satisfies 
   that position of the digit map. Finally, the dot symbol "." stands 
   for zero or more repetitions of the event selector (event, range of 
   events, set of alternative events, or wildcard) that precedes it. As 
   a consequence of the third timing rule above, inter-event timing 
   while matching a terminal dot symbol uses the short timer by default. 

   In addition to these event symbols, the string may contain "S" and 
   "L" inter-event timing specifiers and the "Z" duration modifier. "S" 
   and "L" respectively indicate that the MG SHOULD use the short (S) 
   timer or the long (L) timer for subsequent events, overriding the 
   timing rules described above. If an explicit timing specifier is in 
   effect in one alternative event sequence, but none is given in any 
   other candidate alternative, the timer value set by the explicit 
   timing specifier must be used. If all sequences with explicit timing 
   controls are dropped from the candidate set, timing reverts to the 
   default rules given above. Finally, if conflicting timing specifiers 
   are in effect in different alternative sequences, the long timer 
   shall be used. 

   A "Z" designates a long duration event: placed in front of the 
   symbol(s) designating the event(s) which satisfy a given digit 
   position, it indicates that that position is satisfied only if the 
   duration of the event exceeds the long-duration threshold. The value 
   of this threshold is assumed to be provisioned in the MG, but, like 
   the T, L, and S timers, can be overridden by specification within the 
   DigitMap. 

.1.14.4 DigitMap Completion Event 

   A digit map is active while the Events descriptor which invoked it is 
   active and it has not completed. A digit map completes when: 

   ò  a timer has expired; or 

   ò  an alternative event sequence has been matched and no other 
      alternative event sequence in the digit map could be matched 
      through detection of an additional event (unambiguous match); or 

   ò  an event has been detected such that a match to a complete 
      alternative event sequence of the digit map will be impossible no 
      matter what additional events are received. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 43] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Upon completion, a digit map completion event as defined in the 
   package providing the events being mapped into the digit map shall be 
   generated. At that point the digit map is deactivated. Subsequent 
   events in the package are processed as follows: 

   ò  If EventBufferControl is ON, subsequent digit events are processed 
      in the same way as any other events; 

   ò  If EventBufferControl is OFF, if the active EventsDescriptor did 
      not change, and if individual digit events are not enabled within 
      that descriptor, then digit buffering will be initiated.  
      Buffering will continue until the buffering time specified in the 
      original digit map completion event has expired or until the 
      active EventsDescriptor is replaced. 

   The digit buffer shall take the logical form of a dial string which 
   includes the digit characters as represented in the digit map, 
   possibly preceded by 'Z'.  The threshold value of tone duration used 
   to identify long events shall be the same as that used with the most 
   recently completed digit map. 

   Buffering time defaults to zero (no buffering) unless explicitly set 
   otherwise within the digit map completion event.  If buffering ceases 
   due to buffering timer expiry, the contents of the digit buffer are 
   discarded. 

   If buffering was stopped by a new EventsDescriptor, then if that 
   EventsDescriptor contains a new digit map completion event from the 
   same package as the previous one, any buffered digits are processed 
   against the digit map as described below.  Buffered digits not 
   consumed by the new digit map are handled as if they had were 
   observed after that map completed. 

   If instead the new EventsDescriptor enables the reporting of 
   individual digit events, the entire set of buffered digits shall 
   immediately be processed, the applicable events reported, and the 
   buffer cleared. 

   Finally, if the new EventsDescriptor enables neither a digit map 
   completion event nor the reporting of individual digit events from 
   the package concerned, the buffer contents are discarded and 
   buffering is terminated. 

.1.14.5 DigitMap Procedures 

   Pending completion, successive events shall be processed according to 
   the following rules: 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 44] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   1) The "current dial string", an internal variable, is initially 
      empty. The set of candidate alternative event sequences includes 
      all of the alternatives specified in the digit map. 

   2) At each step, if buffered digits are available, the oldest one 
      (with possible accompanying long digit (Z) qualifier) is removed 
      from the buffer and processing moves to the next step as if the 
      digit event had just been observed. Otherwise a timer is set to 
      wait for the next event, based either on the default timing rules 
      given above or on explicit timing specified in one or more 
      alternative event sequences. If the timer expires and a member of 
      the candidate set of alternatives is fully satisfied, a timeout 
      completion with full match is reported. If the timer expires and 
      part or none of any candidate alternative is satisfied, a timeout 
      completion with partial match is reported. In either case, if the 
      digit map completion event allows for detailed timeout reporting, 
      the reported dial string will end with 'L', 'S', or 'T' as 
      appropriate. 

   3) If an event is detected before the timer expires, it is mapped to 
      a digit string symbol and provisionally added to the end of the 
      current dial string. The duration of the event (long or not long) 
      is noted if and only if this is relevant in the current symbol 
      position (because at least one of the candidate alternative event 
      sequences includes the "Z" modifier at this position in the 
      sequence). 

   4) The current dial string is compared to the candidate alternative 
      event sequences. If and only if a sequence expecting a long-
      duration event at this position is matched (i.e. the event had 
      long duration and met the specification for this position), then 
      any alternative event sequences not specifying a long duration 
      event at this position are discarded, and the current dial string 
      is modified by inserting a "Z" in front of the symbol representing 
      the latest event. Any sequence expecting a long-duration event at 
      this position but not matching the observed event is discarded 
      from the candidate set. If alternative event sequences not 
      specifying a long duration event in the given position remain in 
      the candidate set after application of the above rules, the 
      observed event duration is treated as irrelevant in assessing 
      matches to them. 

   5) If exactly one candidate remains and it has been fully matched, a 
      completion event is generated indicating an unambiguous match. If 
      no candidates remain, the latest event is removed from the current 
      dial string and a completion event is generated indicating full 
      match if one of the candidates from the previous step was fully 
      satisfied before the latest event was detected, or partial match 
      otherwise. The event removed from the current dial string will 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 45] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      then be reported a separate event, buffered, or discarded 
      according to the rules described in the previous section.  This 
      statement is qualified as follows: 

      a) The digit map completion event may specify that the removed 
         event be reported as a parameter of the completion event.  This 
         occurs independently of subsequent processing of the digit 
         event. 

      b) The digit map completion event may specify that the extra digit 
         SHOULD be discarded.  In this case, it is discarded 
         immediately.  Any buffering or other processing applies only to 
         subsequent events. 

   6) If no completion event is reported out of step 5, processing 
      returns to step 2. 

.1.14.6 DigitMap Activation 

   A digit map is activated whenever a new Event descriptor is applied 
   to the Termination or embedded Event descriptor is activated, that 
   Event descriptor contains a digit map completion event. The digit map 
   completion event contains an eventDM field in the requested actions 
   field. Each new activation of a digit map begins at step 1 of the 
   above procedure, with a clear current dial string. Any previous 
   contents of the current dial string from an earlier activation are 
   lost. 

   A digit map completion event that does not contain an eventDM field 
   in its requested actions field is considered an error.  Upon receipt 
   of such an event in an EventsDescriptor, a MG shall respond with an 
   error reponse, including Error 457 û "Missing parameter in signal or 
   event". 

.1.14.7 Interaction Of DigitMap and Event Processing 

   While the digit map is activated, detection is enabled for all events 
   defined in the package containing the specified digit map completion 
   event. Normal event behaviour (e.g. stopping of signals unless the 
   digit completion event has the KeepActive flag enabled) continues to 
   apply for each such event detected, except that: 

   ò  the events in the package containing the specified digit map 
      completion event other than the completion event itself are not 
      individually notified and have no side-effects unless separately 
      enabled; and 

   ò  an event that triggers a partial match completion event is not 
      recognized and therefore has no side effects until reprocessed 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 46] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      following the recognition of the digit map completion event. 
      Similarly buffered digit events are not recognized and have no 
      side effects until processed. 

.1.14.8 Wildcards 

   Note that if a package contains a digit map completion event, then an 
   event specification consisting of the package name with a wildcarded 
   ItemID (Property Name) will activate a digit map; to that end, the 
   event specification must include an eventDM field according to 
   section 7.1.14.6. If the package also contains the digit events 
   themselves, this form of event specification will cause the 
   individual events to be reported to the MGC as they are detected. 

.1.14.9 Example 

   As an example, consider the following dial plan: 

       0                          Local operator 

       00                         Long-distance operator 

       xxxx                       Local extension number (starts 
                                  with 1-7) 

       8xxxxxxx                   Local number 

       #xxxxxxx                   Off-site extension 

       *xx                        Star services 

       91xxxxxxxxxx               Long-distance number 

       9011 + up to 15 digits     International number 

    

   If the DTMF detection package described in E.6 is used to collect the 
   dialled digits, then the dialling plan shown above results in the 
   following digit map: 

    (0| 00|[1-7]xxx|8xxxxxxx|Fxxxxxxx|Exx|91xxxxxxxxxx|9011x.) 

.1.15   Statistics descriptor 

   The Statistics Descriptor provides information describing the status 
   and usage of a Termination during its existence within a specific 
   Context. There is a set of standard statistics kept for each 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 47] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Termination where appropriate (number of octets sent and received for 
   example). The particular statistical properties that are reported for 
   a given Termination are determined by the Packages realized by the 
   Termination. By default, statistics are reported when the Termination 
   is Subtracted from the Context. This behaviour can be overridden by 
   including an empty AuditDescriptor in the Subtract command. 
   Statistics may also be returned from the AuditValue command, or any 
   Add/Move/Modify command using the Audit descriptor. 

   Statistics are cumulative; reporting Statistics does not reset them. 
   Statistics are reset when a Termination is Subtracted from a Context. 

.1.16   Packages descriptor 

   Used only with the AuditValue command, the PackageDescriptor returns 
   a list of Packages realized by the Termination. 

.1.17   ObservedEvents descriptor 

   ObservedEvents is supplied with the Notify command to inform the MGC 
   of which event(s) were detected. Used with the AuditValue command, 
   the ObservedEventsDescriptor returns events in the event buffer which 
   have not been Notified. ObservedEvents contains the RequestIdentifier 
   of the EventsDescriptor that triggered the notification, the event(s) 
   detected, optionally the detection time(s) and any parameters of the 
   observed event. Detection times are reported with a precision of 
   hundredths of a second. 

.1.18   Topology descriptor 

   A Topology descriptor is used to specify flow directions between 
   Terminations in a Context. Contrary to the descriptors in previous 
   subclauses, the Topology descriptor applies to a Context instead of a 
   Termination. The default topology of a Context is that each 
   Termination's transmission is received by all other Terminations. The 
   Topology descriptor is optional to implement. An MG that does not 
   support Topology descriptors, but receives a command containing one, 
   returns Error 444 - "Unsupported or unknown descriptor", and 
   optionally includes a string containing the name of the unsupported 
   Descriptor ("Topology") in the error text in the error descriptor. 

   The Topology descriptor occurs before the commands in an action. It 
   is possible to have an action containing only a Topology descriptor, 
   provided that the Context to which the action applies already exists. 

   A Topology descriptor consists of a sequence of tuples of associated 
   terminations of the form (T1, T2, association[,StreamId]). T1 and T2 
   specify Terminations within the Context, possibly using the ALL or 
   CHOOSE wildcard. If the optional StreamId field is used, the 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 48] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   association applies only to the particular stream between T1 and T2 
   labeled by the StreamId. If the StreamId field is omitted, the 
   topology applies to all streams in the termination. The association 
   specifies how media flows between these two Terminations as follows. 

   ò  (T1, T2, isolate) means that the Terminations matching T2 do not 
      receive media from the Terminations matching T1, nor vice versa. 

   ò  (T1, T2, oneway) means that the Terminations that match T2 receive 
      media from the Terminations matching T1, but not vice versa. In 
      this case use of the ALL wildcard such that there are Terminations 
      that match both T1 and T2 is not allowed. 

   ò  (T1, T2, bothway) means that the Terminations matching T2 receive 
      media from the Terminations matching T1, and vice versa. In this 
      case it is allowed to use wildcards such that there are 
      Terminations that match both T1 and T2. However, if there is a 
      Termination that matches both, no loopback is introduced. 

   CHOOSE wildcards may be used in T1 and T2 as well, under the 
   following restrictions: 

   ò  the action (see clause 8) of which the topology descriptor is part 
      contains an Add command in which a CHOOSE wildcard is used; 

   ò  if a CHOOSE wildcard occurs in T1 or T2, then a partial name SHALL 
      NOT be specified. 

   The CHOOSE wildcard in a Topology descriptor matches the 
   TerminationID that the MG assigns in the first Add command that uses 
   a CHOOSE wildcard in the same action. An existing Termination that 
   matches T1 or T2 in the Context to which a Termination is added, is 
   connected to the newly added Termination as specified by the Topology 
   descriptor. If a termination is not mentioned within a topology 
   descriptor, any topology associated with it remains unchanged. If, 
   however, a new termination is added into a context its association 
   with the other terminations within the context defaults to bothway, 
   unless a topology descriptor is given to change this (eg. if T3 is 
   added to a context with T1 and T2 with topology (T3, T1, oneway) it 
   will be connected bothway to T2). 

   If the topology is applied to one particular stream (T1, T2, 
   association, StreamId), the topology of other streams between the 
   terminations does not change.  

   A topology descriptor SHALL NOT include a combination of associations 
   between two terminations (Ti,Tj) with and without the optional 
   StreamID field, to avoid undefined behavior. For example (T1,T2, 
   bothway) and (T1,T2,isolate,S1) shall not appear in the same 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 49] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   descriptor. Upon receipt of such a topology descriptor, a MG shall 
   respond with an error response, including Error 421 - "Unknown action 
   or illegal combination of actions".  

   Figure 7, and the table following it and Figure 8 following it show 
   some examples of the effect of including topology descriptors in 
   actions. In these examples it is assumed that the topology 
   descriptors are applied in sequence. 

      +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+  
      |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  
      |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  
      |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  
      |       ^  ^       |  |          ^       |  |          ^       |  
      |       |  |       |  |          |       |  |          |       |  
      |    +--+  +--+    |  |          +---+   |  |          +--+    |  
      |    |        |    |  |              |   |  |             |    |  
      |    v        v    |  |              v   |  |             |    |  
      | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  
      | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  
      | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  
      +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+  
      1. No Topology Desc.   2. T1, T2, Isolate    3. T3, T2, Oneway  
        
      +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+  
      |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  
      |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  
      |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  
      |          |       |  |          ^       |  |       ^  ^       |  
      |          |       |  |          |       |  |       |  |       |  
      |          +--+    |  |          +---+   |  |    +--+  +--+    |  
      |             |    |  |              |   |  |    |        |    |  
      |             v    |  |              v   |  |    v        v    |  
      | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  
      | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  
      | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  
      +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+  
      4. T2, T3 oneway      5. T2, T3 bothway     6. T1, T2 bothway   
        
                       Figure 7: Example topologies 
     Note: the direction of the arrow indicates the direction of flow 

    
    Topology Description 

    1        No topology descriptors 

              When no topology descriptors are included, all 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 50] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    Topology Description 

              Terminations have a bothway connection to all other 
              Terminations. 

    2        T1, T2 Isolate 

              Removes the connection between T1 and T2. T3 has a 
              bothway connection with both T1 and T2. T1 and T2 
              have bothway connection to T3. 

    3        T3, T2 oneway 

              A oneway connection from T3 to T2 (i.e. T2 receives 
              media flow from T3). A bothway connection between T1 
              and T3. 

    4        T2, T3 oneway 

              A oneway connection between T2 to T3. T1 and T3 
              remain bothway connected 

    5        T2, T3 bothway 

              T2 is bothway connected to T3. This results in the 
              same as 2. 

    6        T1, T2 bothway (T2, T3 bothway and T1, T3 bothway 
              may be implied or explicit). All Terminations have a 
              bothway connection to all other Terminations. 

    
              +----+             +----+                 +----+  
              | T2 |             | T2 |                 | T2 |  
              +----+             +----+                 +----+  
               //\\               //\\                   //\\  
              //  \\             //  \\                 //  \\  
            1//2  1\\2         1//2  1\\2             1//2  1\\2  
           +---+   +---+      +---+   +---+          +---+   +---+  
           |   | 1 |   |      |   | 1 |   |          |   | 1 |   |  
           |   |<->|   |      |   |<->|   |          |   |<--|   |  
           |T1 |   |T3 |      |T1 |   |T3 |          |T1 |   |T3 |  
           |   | 2 |   |      |   | 2 |   |          |   | 2 |   |  
           |   |<->|   |      |   |-->|   |          |   |-->|   |  
           |   |   |   |      |   |   |   |          |   |   |   |  
           +---+   +---+      +---+   +---+          +---+   +---+  
        
      1. No Topology Desc.  2. T1,T3, oneway,2      3. T3, T1,oneway,1  


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 51] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


        
                Figure 8: Example Topology at stream level 

    

   A oneway connection must be implemented in such a way that the other 
   Terminations in the Context are not aware of the change in topology. 

.1.19   Error Descriptor 

   If a responder encounters an error when processing a transaction 
   request, it must include an error descriptor in its response.  A 
   Notify request may contain an error descriptor as well. 

   An error descriptor consists of an IANA-registered error code, 
   optionally accompanied by an error text.  H.248.8 contains a list of 
   valid error codes and error descriptions. 

   An error descriptor shall be specified at the "deepest level" that is 
   semantically appropriate for the error being described and that is 
   possible given any parsing problems with the original request. An 
   error descriptor may refer to a syntactical construct other than 
   where it appears. For example, Error 422 û "Syntax Error in Action", 
   could appear within a command even though it refers to the larger 
   construct û the action û and not the particular command within which 
   it appears. 

    
.2   Command Application Programming Interface 

   Following is an Application Programming Interface (API) describing 
   the Commands of the protocol. This API is shown to illustrate the 
   Commands and their parameters and is not intended to specify 
   implementation (e.g. via use of blocking function calls). It 
   describes the input parameters in parentheses after the command name 
   and the return values in front of the Command. This is only for 
   descriptive purposes; the actual Command syntax and encoding are 
   specified in later subclauses. The order of parameters to commands is 
   not fixed. Descriptors may appear as parameters to commands in any 
   order. The descriptors SHALL be processed in the order in which they 
   appear. 

   Any reply to a command may contain an error descriptor; the API does 
   not specifically show this. 

   All parameters enclosed by square brackets ([. . .]) are considered 
   optional. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 52] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.1 Add 

   The Add Command adds a Termination to a Context. 

   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor] (*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,DigitMapDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
   [,PackagesDescriptor] 
      Add( TerminationID 
         [, MediaDescriptor] 
         [, ModemDescriptor] (*) 
         [, MuxDescriptor] 
         [, EventsDescriptor] 
         [, EventBufferDescriptor]  
         [, SignalsDescriptor] 
         [, DigitMapDescriptor] 
         [, AuditDescriptor] 
      ) 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (05/2002). 

   The TerminationID specifies the Termination to be added to the 
   Context. The Termination is either created, or taken from the null 
   Context. If a CHOOSE wildcard is used in the TerminationID, the 
   selected  TerminationID will be returned. Wildcards may be used in an 
   Add, but such usage would be unusual. If the wildcard matches more 
   than one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with 
   results reported for each one. The order of attempts when multiple 
   TerminationIDs match is not specified. 

   The optional MediaDescriptor describes all media streams. 

   The optional MuxDescriptor specifies a multiplexer if applicable. For 
   convenience, if a Multiplex descriptor is present in an Add command 
   and lists any Terminations that are not currently in the Context, 
   such Terminations are added to the Context as if individual Add 
   commands listing the Terminations were invoked. If an error occurs on 
   such an implied Add, error 471 û Implied Add for Multiplex failure 
   shall be returned and further processing of the command shall cease. 

   The EventsDescriptor parameter is optional. If present, it provides 
   the list of events that SHOULD be detected on the Termination. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 53] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The EventBufferDescriptor parameter is optional.  If present, it 
   provides the list of events that the MG is requested to detect and 
   buffer when EventBufferControl equals LockStep. 

   The SignalsDescriptor parameter is optional. If present, it provides 
   the list of signals that SHOULD be applied to the Termination. 

   The DigitMapDescriptor parameter is optional. If present, it defines 
   a DigitMap definition that may be used in an EventsDescriptor. 

   The AuditDescriptor is optional. If present, the command will return 
   descriptors as specified in the AuditDescriptor. 

   All descriptors that can be modified could be returned by MG if a 
   parameter was underspecified or overspecified. ObservedEvents, 
   Statistics, and Packages, and the EventBuffer descriptors are 
   returned only if requested in the AuditDescriptor. 

   Add SHALL NOT be used on a Termination with a serviceState of 
   "OutofService". 

.2.2 Modify 

   The Modify Command modifies the properties of a Termination. 

   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor] (*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,DigitMapDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
   [,PackagesDescriptor] 
      Modify( TerminationID 
         [, MediaDescriptor] 
         [, ModemDescriptor] (*) 
         [, MuxDescriptor] 
         [, EventsDescriptor] 
         [, EventBufferDescriptor] 
         [, SignalsDescriptor] 
         [, DigitMapDescriptor] 
         [, AuditDescriptor] 
      ) 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (05/2002). 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 54] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    

   The TerminationID may be specific if a single Termination in the 
   Context is to be modified. Use of wildcards in the TerminationID may 
   be appropriate for some operations. If the wildcard matches more than 
   one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with results 
   reported for each one. The order of attempts when multiple 
   TerminationIDs match is not specified. The CHOOSE option is an error, 
   as the Modify command may only be used on existing Terminations. 

   For convenience, if a Multiplex Descriptor is present in a Modify 
   command, then: 

   ò  if the new Multiplex Descriptor lists any Terminations that are 
      not currently in the Context, such Terminations are added to the 
      context as if individual Add commands listing the Terminations 
      were invoked. 

   ò  if any Terminations listed previously in the Multiplex Descriptor 
      are no longer present in the new Multiplex Descriptor, they are 
      subtracted from the context as if individual Subtract commands 
      listing the Terminations were invoked. 

   The remaining parameters to Modify are the same as those to Add. 
   Possible return values are the same as those to Add. 

.2.3 Subtract 

   The Subtract Command disconnects a Termination from its Context and 
   returns statistics on the Termination's participation in the Context. 

   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor] (*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,DigitMapDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
   [,PackagesDescriptor] 
      Subtract(TerminationID 
         [, AuditDescriptor] 
      ) 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (05/2002). 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 55] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   TerminationID in the input parameters represents the Termination that 
   is being subtracted. The TerminationID may be specific or may be a 
   wildcard value indicating that all (or a set of related) Terminations 
   in the Context of the Subtract Command are to be subtracted. If the 
   wildcard matches more than one TerminationID, all possible matches 
   are attempted, with results reported for each one. The order of 
   attempts when multiple TerminationIDs match is not specified. 

   The use of CHOOSE in the TerminationID is an error, as the Subtract 
   command may only be used on existing Terminations. 

   ALL may be used as the ContextID as well as the TerminationId in a 
   Subtract, which would have the effect of deleting all Contexts, 
   deleting all ephemeral Terminations, and returning all physical 
   Terminations to Null Context. Subtract of a termination from the Null 
   Context is not allowed. 

   For convenience, if a multiplexing Termination is the object of a 
   Subtract command, then any bearer Terminations listed in its 
   Multiplex Descriptor are subtracted from the context as if individual 
   Subtract commands listing the Terminations were invoked. 

   By default, the Statistics parameter is returned to report 
   information collected on the Termination or Terminations specified in 
   the Command. The information reported applies to the Termination's or 
   Terminations' existence in the Context from which it or they are 
   being subtracted. 

   The AuditDescriptor is optional. If present, the command will return 
   only those descriptors as specified in the AuditDescriptor, which may 
   be empty. If omitted, the Statistics descriptor is returned, by 
   default. Possible return values are the same as those to Add. 

   When a provisioned Termination is Subtracted from a Context, its 
   property values shall revert to:  

   ò  the default value, if specified for the property and not 
      overridden by provisioning; 

   ò  otherwise, the provisioned value. 

.2.4 Move 

   The Move Command moves a Termination to another Context from its 
   current Context in one atomic operation. The Move command is the only 
   command that refers to a Termination in a Context different from that 
   to which the command is applied. The Move command shall not be used 
   to move Terminations to or from the null Context. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 56] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor] (*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,DigitMapDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
   [,PackagesDescriptor] 
      Move( TerminationID 
         [, MediaDescriptor] 
         [, ModemDescriptor] (*) 
         [, MuxDescriptor] 
         [, EventsDescriptor] 
         [, EventBufferDescriptor] 
         [, SignalsDescriptor] 
         [, DigitMapDescriptor] 
         [, AuditDescriptor] 
      ) 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (05/2002). 

   The TerminationID specifies the Termination to be moved. It may be 
   wildcarded, but CHOOSE shall not be used in the TerminationID. If the 
   wildcard matches more than one TerminationID, all possible matches 
   are attempted, with results reported for each one. The order of 
   attempts when multiple TerminationIDs match is not specified. The 
   Context to which the Termination is moved is indicated by the target 
   ContextId in the Action. If the last remaining Termination is moved 
   out of a Context, the Context is deleted. 

   The Move command does not affect the properties of the Termination on 
   which it operates, except those properties explicitly modified by 
   descriptors included in the Move command. The AuditDescriptor with 
   the Statistics option, for example, would return statistics on the 
   Termination just prior to the Move. Possible descriptors returned 
   from Move are the same as for Add. 

   For convenience, if a multiplexing Termination is the object of a 
   Move command, then any bearer Terminations listed in its Multiplex 
   Descriptor are also moved as if individual Move commands listing the 
   Terminations were invoked. 

   Move SHALL NOT be used on a Termination with a serviceState of 
   "OutofService". 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 57] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.5 AuditValue 

   The AuditValue Command returns the current values of properties, 
   events, signals and statistics associated with Terminations. An 
   AuditValue may request the contents of a descriptor or of a single 
   property, event, signal or statistics. 

   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor] (*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,DigitMapDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
   [,PackagesDescriptor] 
      AuditValue(TerminationID, 
         AuditDescriptor 
      ) 

   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (05/2002). 

   TerminationID may be specific or wildcarded. If the wildcard matches 
   more than one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with 
   results reported for each one. The order of attempts when multiple 
   TerminationIDs match is not specified. If a wildcarded response is 
   requested, only one command return is generated, with the contents 
   containing the union of the values of all Terminations matching the 
   wildcard. This convention may reduce the volume of data required to 
   audit a group of Terminations. Use of CHOOSE is an error.  

   Descriptors or individual properties, signals, events and statistics 
   can be audited. 

   ò  An audit of a descriptor may be requested by identifying the 
      desired descriptor in the AuditDescriptor with no further 
      information.  

   ò  To audit an individual property in the media descriptor the 
      relevant stream ID (optional), group ID (optional) and propertyID 
      are included. The current value of the property is returned. Group 
      ID is used in the case where the local control Reserve Group flag 
      is used. Group ID 1 corresponds to the first group (session 
      decription) reserved, Group ID 2 the next group etcetera. 

   ò  To audit a signal the relevant signal list ID and/or signal ID are 
      provided. Only if the signal is active the values of all the 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 58] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      signal parameters are returned including: the keepactive 
      indication, signal type, duration, signal completion indication 
      and package defined properties. 

   ò  To audit an event, the relevant stream id (optional), eventID, 
      requestID (optional) are provided. The values of all the event 
      parameters are returned including: event actions and packaged 
      defined parameters. 

   ò  To audit a statistic the identity of the statistic is provided. 
      The current value of the statistic is returned. The statistic is 
      not reset. 

   ò  To audit a package the identity and version of the package is 
      provided. All properties, signals, events and statistics defined 
      in that particular package are returned with their current value. 

   It is possible to audit multiple individual items in one request. 

   If a descriptor audit is requested, the appropriate descriptors, with 
   the current values for the Termination, are returned from AuditValue. 
   Values appearing in multiple instances of a descriptor are defined to 
   be alternate values supported, with each parameter in a descriptor 
   considered independent. 

   ObservedEvents returns a list of events in the EventBuffer. If the 
   ObservedEventsDescriptor is audited while a DigitMap is active, the 
   returned ObservedEvents descriptor also includes a digit map 
   completion event that shows the current dial string but does not show 
   a Termination method. 

   EventBuffer returns the set of events and associated parameter values 
   currently enabled in the EventBufferDescriptor. PackagesDescriptor 
   returns a list of packages realized by the Termination. 
   DigitMapDescriptor returns the name or value of the current DigitMap 
   for the Termination. DigitMap requested in an AuditValue command with 
   TerminationID ALL returns all DigitMaps in the gateway. Statistics 
   returns the current values of all statistics being kept on the 
   Termination. Specifying an empty Audit descriptor results in only the 
   TerminationID being returned. This may be useful to get a list of 
   TerminationIDs when used with wildcard. Annexes A and B provide a 
   special syntax for presenting such a list in condensed form, such 
   that the AuditValue command tag does not have to be repeated for each 
   TerminationID. 

   AuditValue results depend on the Context, viz. specific, null, or 
   wildcarded. (Note that ContextID All does not include the null 
   Context.) The TerminationID may be specific, or wildcarded. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 59] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The following are examples of what is returned in case the context 
   and/or the termination is wildcarded and a wildcarded response has 
   been specified. 

   Assume that the gateway has 4 terminations: t1/1, t1/2, t2/1 and 
   t2/2. Assume that terminations t1/* have implemented packages aaa and 
   bbb and that terminations t2/* have implemented packages ccc and ddd. 
   Assume that Context 1 has t1/1 and t2/1 in it and that Context 2 has 
   t1/2 and t2/2 in it. 

   The command: 

      Context=1{AuditValue=t1/1{Audit{Packages}}} 

   Returns:  

      Context=1{AuditValue=t1/1{Packages{aaa,bbb}}} 

   The command:  

      Context=*{AuditValue=t2/*{Audit{Packages}}}  

   Returns: 

      Context=1{AuditValue=t2/1{Packages{ccc,ddd}}}, 
      Context=2{AuditValue=t2/2{Packages{ccc,ddd}}}  

   The command: 

      Context=*{W-AuditValue=t1/*{Audit{Packages}}}  

   Returns: 

      Context=*{W-AuditValue=t1/*{Packages{aaa,bbb}}}  

   Note: A wildcard response may also be used for other commands such as 
   Subtract. 

   The following illustrates other information that can be obtained with 
   the AuditValue Command: 

   ContextID   TerminationID   Information Obtained 

   Specific    wildcard        Audit of matching Terminations in a 
                                Context 

   Specific    specific        Audit of a single Termination in a 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 60] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                                Context 

   Null        Root            Audit of Media Gateway state and 
                                events 

   Null        wildcard        Audit of all matching Terminations 
                                in the null Context 

   Null        specific        Audit of a single Termination 
                                outside of any Context 

   All         wildcard        Audit of all matching Terminations 
                                and the Context to which they are 
                                associated 

   All         Root            List of all ContextIds (the 
                                ContextID list SHOULD be returned by 
                                using multiple action replies, each 
                                containing a ContextID from the 
                                list) 

   All         Specific        (Non-null) ContextID in which the 
                                Termination currently exists 

    

.2.6 AuditCapabilities 

   The AuditCapabilities Command returns the possible values of 
   properties, events, signals and statistics associated with 
   Terminations. An AuditCapabilities may be requested for the contents 
   of a descriptor or for a single property, event, signal or 
   statistics. 

   TerminationID 
   [,MediaDescriptor] 
   [,ModemDescriptor](*) 
   [,MuxDescriptor] 
   [,EventsDescriptor] 
   [,SignalsDescriptor] 
   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor] 
   [,EventBufferDescriptor] 
   [,StatisticsDescriptor]  
      AuditCapabilities( 
         TerminationID, 
         AuditDescriptor 
      ) 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 61] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   (*) ModemDescriptor has been deprecated in H.248.1 (02/2002). 

   Descriptors or individual properties, signals, events and statistics 
   can be audited. 

   ò  An audit of a entire descriptor may be requested by identifying 
      the desired descriptor in the AuditDescriptor with no further 
      information.  

   ò  To audit an individual property in the media descriptor the 
      relevant stream ID (optional) and propertyID are included. A list 
      of possible values of the property are returned.  

   ò  To audit a signal the relevant signal list ID and/or signal ID are 
      provided. A list of possible values associated with each signal 
      parameter is returned (including: the keepactive indication, 
      signal type, duration, signal completion indication and package 
      defined properties). 

   ò  To audit an event the relevant stream id (optional), eventID, 
      requestID (optional) are provided. A list of possible values 
      associated with each event parameter is returned (including: event 
      actions and packaged defined parameters). 

   ò  To audit a statistic the identity of statistic is provided. The 
      possible values of the statistic are returned. The statistic is 
      not reset. 

   If a descriptor audit is requested the appropriate descriptors, with 
   the possible values for the Termination, are returned from 
   AuditCapabilities. Descriptors may be repeated where there are 
   multiple possible values.  

   If a wildcarded response is requested, only one command return is 
   generated, with the contents containing the union of the values of 
   all Terminations matching the wildcard. This convention may reduce 
   the volume of data required to audit a group of Terminations. 

   If a property, signal, event or statistic is audited, the appropriate 
   properties, signals events, and statistics with the capabilities of 
   the Termination are returned from AuditCapabilities. 

   Interpretation of what capabilities are requested for various values 
   of ContextID and TerminationID is the same as in AuditValue. 

   The EventsDescriptor returns the list of possible events on the 
   Termination together with the list of all possible values for the 
   EventsDescriptor Parameters. EventBufferDescriptor returns the same 
   information as EventsDescriptor. The SignalsDescriptor returns the 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 62] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   list of possible signals that could be applied to the Termination 
   together with the list of all possible values for the Signals 
   Parameters. StatisticsDescriptor returns the names of the statistics 
   being kept on the termination. ObservedEventsDescriptor returns the 
   names of active events on the Termination. DigitMap and Packages are 
   not legal in AuditCapability. 

   The following illustrates other information that can be obtained with 
   the AuditCapabilties Command: 

   ContextID  TerminationID   Information Obtained 

   Specific   wildcard        Audit of matching Terminations in 
                              a Context 

   Specific   specific        Audit of a single Termination in a 
                              Context 

   Null       Root            Audit of MG state and events 

   Null       wildcard        Audit of all matching Terminations 
                              in the Null Context 

   Null       specific        Audit of a single Termination 
                              outside of any Context 

   All        wildcard        Audit of all matching Terminations 
                              and the Context to which they are 
                              associated 

   All        Root            Same as for AuditValue 

   All        Specific        Same as for AuditValue 

    

.2.7 Notify 

   The Notify Command allows the Media Gateway to notify the Media 
   Gateway Controller of events occurring within the Media Gateway. 

   TerminationID 
      Notify(TerminationID, 
         ObservedEventsDescriptor, 
         [ErrorDescriptor] 
      ) 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 63] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The TerminationID parameter specifies the Termination issuing the 
   Notify Command. The TerminationID shall be a fully qualified name. 

   The ObservedEventsDescriptor contains the RequestID and a list of 
   events that the Media Gateway detected in the order that they were 
   detected. Each event in the list is accompanied by parameters 
   associated with the event and optionally an indication of the time 
   that the event was detected. Procedures for sending Notify commands 
   with RequestID equal to 0 are for further study.  

   Notify Commands with RequestID not equal to 0 shall occur only as the 
   result of detection of an event specified by an Events descriptor 
   which is active on the Termination concerned. 

   The RequestID returns the RequestID parameter of the EventsDescriptor 
   that triggered the Notify Command. It is used to correlate the 
   notification with the request that triggered it. The events in the 
   list must have been requested via the triggering EventsDescriptor or 
   embedded events descriptor unless the RequestID is 0 (which is for 
   further study). 

   The ErrorDescriptor may be sent in the Notify Command as a result of 
   Error 518 - "Event buffer full". 

.2.8 ServiceChange 

   The ServiceChange Command allows the Media Gateway to notify the 
   Media Gateway Controller that a Termination or group of Terminations 
   is about to be taken out of service or has just been returned to 
   service. The Media Gateway Controller may indicate that 
   Termination(s) shall be taken out of or returned to service. The 
   Media Gateway may notify the MGC that the capability of a Termination 
   has changed. It also allows a MGC to hand over control of a MG to 
   another MGC. 

   TerminationID, 
   [ServiceChangeDescriptor] 
      ServiceChange(TerminationID, 
         ServiceChangeDescriptor 
      ) 

   The TerminationID parameter specifies the Termination(s) that are 
   taken out of or returned to service. Wildcarding of Termination names 
   is permitted, with the exception that the CHOOSE mechanism shall not 
   be used. Use of the "Root" TerminationID indicates a ServiceChange 
   affecting the entire Media Gateway. 

   The ServiceChangeDescriptor contains the following parameters as 
   required: 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 64] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ò  ServiceChangeMethod 
   ò  ServiceChangeReason 
   ò  ServiceChangeDelay 
   ò  ServiceChangeAddress 
   ò  ServiceChangeProfile 
   ò  ServiceChangeVersion 
   ò  ServiceChangeMgcId 
   ò  TimeStamp 
   ò  ServiceChangeInfo 

   The ServiceChangeMethod parameter specifies the type of ServiceChange 
   that will or has occurred: 

   1) Graceful û indicates that the specified Terminations will be taken 
      out of service after the specified ServiceChangeDelay; established 
      connections are not yet affected, but the Media Gateway Controller 
      SHOULD refrain from establishing new connections and SHOULD 
      attempt to gracefully tear down existing connections on the 
      Termination(s) affected by the serviceChange command. The MG 
      SHOULD set Termination serviceState at the expiry of 
      ServiceChangeDelay or the removal of the Termination from an 
      active Context (whichever is first), to "out of service". 

   2) Forced û indicates that the specified Terminations were taken 
      abruptly out of service and any established connections associated 
      with them may be lost. For non-Root terminations, the MGC is 
      responsible for cleaning up the Context (if any) with which the 
      failed Termination is associated. At a minimum the Termination 
      shall be subtracted from the Context. The Termination serviceState 
      SHOULD be "out of service". For the root termination, the MGC can 
      assume that all connections are lost on the MG and thus can 
      consider that all the terminations have been subtracted. 

   3) Restart û indicates that service will be restored on the specified 
      Terminations after expiration of the ServiceChangeDelay. The 
      serviceState SHOULD be set to "inService" upon expiry of 
      ServiceChangeDelay. 

   4) Disconnected û always applied with the Root TerminationID, 
      indicates that the MG lost communication with the MGC, but it was 
      subsequently restored to the same MGC (possibly after trying other 
      MGCs on a pre-provisioned list). Since MG state may have changed, 
      the MGC may wish to use the Audit command to resynchronize its 
      state with the MG's. 

   5) Handoff û sent from the MGC to the MG, this reason indicates that 
      the MGC is going out of service and a new MGC association must be 
      established. Sent from the MG to the MGC, this indicates that the 
      MG is attempting to establish a new association in accordance with 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 65] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      a Handoff received from the MGC with which it was previously 
      associated. 

   6) Failover û sent from MG to MGC to indicate the primary MG is out 
      of service and a secondary MG is taking over. This serviceChange 
      method is also sent from the MG to the MGC when the MG detects 
      that MGC has failed. 

   7) Another value whose meaning is mutually understood between the MG 
      and the MGC. 

   The ServiceChangeReason parameter specifies the reason why the 
   ServiceChange has or will occur. It consists of an alphanumeric token 
   (IANA registered) and, optionally, an explanatory string. 

   The optional ServiceChangeAddress parameter specifies the address 
   (e.g. IP port number for IP networks) to be used for subsequent 
   communications. It can be specified in the input parameter descriptor 
   or the returned result descriptor. ServiceChangeAddress and 
   ServiceChangeMgcId parameters must not both be present in the 
   ServiceChangeDescriptor or the ServiceChangeResultDescriptor. The 
   ServiceChangeAddress provides an address to be used within the 
   Context of the association currently being negotiated, while the 
   ServiceChangeMgcId provides an alternate address where the MG SHOULD 
   seek to establish another association. Note that the use of 
   ServiceChangeAddress is not encouraged.  MGCs and MGs must be able to 
   cope with the ServiceChangeAddress being either a full address or 
   just a port number in the case of TCP transports. 

   The optional ServiceChangeDelay parameter is expressed in seconds. If 
   the delay is absent or set to zero, the delay value SHOULD be 
   considered to be null. In the case of a "graceful" 
   ServiceChangeMethod, a null delay indicates that the Media Gateway 
   Controller SHOULD wait for the natural removal of existing 
   connections and SHOULD not establish new connections. For "graceful" 
   only, a null delay means the MG must not set serviceState "out of 
   service" until the Termination is in the null Context. 

   The optional ServiceChangeProfile parameter specifies the Profile (if 
   any) of the protocol supported. The ServiceChangeProfile includes the 
   version of the profile supported. 

   The optional ServiceChangeVersion parameter contains the protocol 
   version and is used if protocol version negotiation occurs (see 
   11.3). 

   The optional TimeStamp parameter specifies the actual time as kept by 
   the sender. As such, it is not necessarily absolute time according 
   to, for example, a local time zone û it merely establishes an 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 66] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   arbitrary starting time against which all future timestamps 
   transmitted by a sender during this association shall be compared. It 
   can be used by the responder to determine how its notion of time 
   differs from that of its correspondent. TimeStamp is sent with a 
   precision of hundredths of a second. 

   The optional Extension parameter may contain any value whose meaning 
   is mutually understood by the MG and MGC. 

   The optional ServiceChangeInfo parameter may contain the 
   package/property/signal/event/statistic of the reason that caused the 
   service change. 

   A ServiceChange Command specifying the "Root" for the TerminationID 
   and ServiceChangeMethod equal to Restart is a registration command by 
   which a Media Gateway announces its existence to the Media Gateway 
   Controller. The Media Gateway may also register by specifying the 
   "Root" for the TerminationID and ServiceChangeMethod equal to 
   Failover when the MG detects MGC failures. The Media Gateway is 
   expected to be provisioned with the name of one primary and 
   optionally some number of alternate Media Gateway Controllers. 
   Acknowledgement of the ServiceChange Command completes the 
   registration process, except when the MGC has returned an alternative 
   ServiceChangeMgcId as described in the following paragraph. The MG 
   may specify the transport ServiceChangeAddress to be used by the MGC 
   for sending messages in the ServiceChangeAddress parameter in the 
   input ServiceChangeDescriptor. The MG may specify an address in the 
   ServiceChangeAddress parameter of the ServiceChange request, and the 
   MGC may also do so in the ServiceChange reply. In either case, the 
   recipient must use the supplied address as the destination for all 
   subsequent transaction requests within the association. At the same 
   time, as indicated in clause 9, transaction replies and pending 
   indications must be sent to the address from which the corresponding 
   requests originated. This must be done even if it implies extra 
   messaging because commands and responses cannot be packed together. 
   The TimeStamp parameter shall be sent with a registration command and 
   its response. 

   The Media Gateway Controller may return a ServiceChangeMgcId 
   parameter that describes the Media Gateway Controller that SHOULD 
   preferably be contacted for further service by the Media Gateway. In 
   this case the Media Gateway shall reissue the ServiceChange command 
   to the new Media Gateway Controller. The MGC specified in a 
   ServiceChangeMgcId, if provided, shall be contacted before any 
   further alternate MGCs. On a HandOff message from MGC to MG, the 
   ServiceChangeMgcId is the new MGC that will take over from the 
   current MGC. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 67] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The return from ServiceChange is empty except when the Root 
   terminationID is used. In that case it includes the following 
   parameters as required: 

   ò  ServiceChangeAddress, if the responding MGC wishes to specify a 
      new destination for messages from the MG for the remainder of the 
      association; 

   ò  ServiceChangeMgcId, if the responding MGC does not wish to sustain 
      an association with the MG; 

   ò  ServiceChangeProfile, if the responder wishes to negotiate the 
      profile to be used for the association. The profile (name and 
      version) is only returned in reply in the case that the MGC cannot 
      support the specified profiles in the ServiceChangeRequest. The 
      returned reply shall indicate the profile and version supported or 
      "NoProfile" if no profile is supported. Upon reception of a 
      profile in the reply the MG may continue the relationship with the 
      current MGC or contact secondary MGCs and establish a relationship 
      with them. If the profile is not returned the MGC will use the 
      capabilities specified by the Profile indicated in the service 
      change request; 

   ò  ServiceChangeVersion, if the responder wishes to negotiate the 
      version of the protocol to be used for the association. 

   The following ServiceChangeReasons are defined. This list may be 
   extended by an IANA registration as outlined in 14.3. 

      900 Service Restored 
      901 Cold Boot 
      902 Warm Boot 
      903 MGC Directed Change 
      904 Termination malfunctioning 
      905 Termination taken out of service 
      906 Loss of lower layer connectivity (e.g. downstream sync) 
      907 Transmission Failure 
      908 MG Impending Failure 
      909 MGC Impending Failure 
      910 Media Capability Failure 
      911 Modem Capability Failure 
      912 Mux Capability Failure 
      913 Signal Capability Failure 
      914 Event Capability Failure 
      915 State Loss 
      916 Packages Change 
      917 Capability Change 

    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 68] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.9 Manipulating and Auditing Context Attributes 

   The commands of the protocol as discussed in the preceding subclauses 
   apply to Terminations. This subclause specifies the processing of 
   Context attributes. 

   An action may contain instructions for the manipulation and auditing 
   of Context properties (see clause 8). 

   The MGC may audit a specific Context to determine the current value 
   of individual context properties.  The MGC may determine the current 
   values for all existing (non-NULL) Contexts by specifying ContextID 
   ALL in the Audit request. If context attributes are added or have 
   been modified by the same action as the Audit request the value/s 
   returned shall be after the action has been applied. 

   The following illustrates information that can be obtained with a 
   context Audit: 

    ContextID TerminationID   Audit 

    Specific  Not Applicable  Context attribute's value in the 
                                specified context. 

    Null      Not Applicable  Not Allowed  

    All       Not Applicable  Current values for all existing 
                                (non-NULL) Contexts by specifying 
                                ContextID ALL in the Audit request. 

                                A response for ContextID ALL is 
                                presented through an actionReply 
                                per context. 

    

   An action may also include a request to change the attributes of a 
   Context. 

   The Context properties that may be included in an action reply are 
   used to return information to a MGC. This can be information 
   requested by an audit of Context attributes or details of the effect 
   of manipulation of a Context. 

   If a MG receives an action which contains both a request to audit 
   context attributes and a request to manipulate those attributes, the 
   response SHALL include the values of the attributes after processing 
   the manipulation request. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 69] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.10   Generic Command Syntax 

   The protocol can be encoded in a binary format or in a text format. 
   MGCs SHOULD support both encoding formats. MGs may support both 
   formats. 

   The protocol syntax for the binary format of the protocol is defined 
   in Annex A. Annex C specifies the encoding of the Local and Remote 
   descriptors for use with the binary format. 

   A complete ABNF of the text encoding of the protocol per RFC 2234 is 
   given in Annex B. SDP is used as the encoding of the Local and Remote 
   descriptors for use with the text encoding as modified in 7.1.8. 

    
  TRANSACTIONS 

   Commands between the Media Gateway Controller and the Media Gateway 
   are grouped into Transactions, each of which is identified by a 
   TransactionID. Transactions consist of one or more Actions. An Action 
   consists of a non-empty series of Commands, Context property 
   modifications, or Context property audits that are limited to 
   operating within a single Context. Consequently, each Action 
   typically specifies a ContextID. However, there are two circumstances 
   where a specific ContextID is not provided with an Action. One is the 
   case of modification of a Termination outside of a Context. The other 
   is where the controller requests the gateway to create a new Context. 
   Figure 9 is a graphic representation of the Transaction, Action and 
   Command relationships. 

      +----------------------------------------------------------+  
      | Transaction x                                            |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  
      |  | Action 1                                           |  |  
      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+  +---------+ |  |  
      |  | | Command |  | Command |  | Command |  | Command | |  |  
      |  | |    1    |  |    2    |  |    3    |  |    4    | |  |  
      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+  +---------+ |  |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  
      |                                                          |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  
      |  | Action 2                                           |  |  
      |  | +---------+                                        |  |  
      |  | | Command |                                        |  |  
      |  | |    1    |                                        |  |  
      |  | +---------+                                        |  |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  
      |                                                          |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 70] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      |  | Action 3                                           |  |  
      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+              |  |  
      |  | | Command |  | Command |  | Command |              |  |  
      |  | |    1    |  |    2    |  |    3    |              |  |  
      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+              |  |  
      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |  
      +----------------------------------------------------------+  
         
                     Figure 9: Transactions, Actions and Commands  

   Transactions are presented as TransactionRequests. Corresponding 
   responses to a TransactionRequest are received in a single reply, 
   possibly preceded by a number of TransactionPending messages (see 
   8.2.3). 

   Transactions guarantee ordered Command processing. That is, Commands 
   within a Transaction are executed sequentially. Ordering of 
   Transactions is NOT guaranteed û transactions may be executed in any 
   order, or simultaneously. 

   At the first failing Command in a Transaction, processing of the 
   remaining Commands in that Transaction stops. If a command contains a 
   wildcarded TerminationID, the command is attempted with each of the 
   actual TerminationIDs matching the wildcard. A response within the 
   TransactionReply is included for each matching TerminationID, even if 
   one or more instances generated an error. If any TerminationID 
   matching a wildcard results in an error when executed, any commands 
   following the wildcarded command are not attempted. 

   Commands may be marked as "Optional" which can override this 
   behaviour û if a command marked as Optional results in an error, 
   subsequent commands in the Transaction will be executed. If a command 
   fails, the MG shall as far as possible restore the state that existed 
   prior to the attempted execution of the command before continuing 
   with command processing. 

   A TransactionReply includes the results for all of the Commands in 
   the corresponding TransactionRequest. The TransactionReply includes 
   the return values for the Commands that were executed successfully, 
   and the Command and error descriptor for any Command that failed. 
   TransactionPending is used to periodically notify the receiver that a 
   Transaction has not completed yet, but is actively being processed.  

   Applications SHOULD implement an application level timer per 
   transaction. Expiration of the timer SHOULD cause a retransmission of 
   the request. Receipt of a Reply SHOULD cancel the timer. Receipt of 
   Pending SHOULD restart the timer. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 71] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.1   Common parameters 

.1.1 Transaction Identifiers 

   Transactions are identified by a TransactionID, which is assigned by 
   sender and is unique within the scope of the sender. A response 
   containing an error descriptor to indicate that the TransactionID is 
   missing in a request shall use TransactionID 0 in the corresponding 
   TransactionReply. 

.1.2 Context Identifiers 

   Contexts are identified by a ContextID, which is assigned by the 
   Media Gateway and is unique within the scope of the Media Gateway. 
   The Media Gateway Controller shall use the ContextID supplied by the 
   Media Gateway in all subsequent Transactions relating to that 
   Context. The protocol makes reference to a distinguished value that 
   may be used by the Media Gateway Controller when referring to a 
   Termination that is currently not associated with a Context, namely 
   the null ContextID. 

   The CHOOSE wildcard is used to request that the Media Gateway create 
   a new Context.  

   The MGC may use the ALL wildcard to address all Contexts on the MG. 
   The null Context is not included when the ALL wildcard is used. 

   The MGC shall not use partially specified ContextIDs containing the 
   CHOOSE or ALL wildcards. 

.2   Transaction Application Programming Interface 

   Following is an Application Programming Interface (API) describing 
   the Transactions of the protocol. This API is shown to illustrate the 
   Transactions and their parameters and is not intended to specify 
   implementation (e.g. via use of blocking function calls). It will 
   describe the input parameters and return values expected to be used 
   by the various Transactions of the protocol from a very high level. 
   Transaction syntax and encodings are specified in later subclauses. 

.2.1 TransactionRequest 

   The TransactionRequest is invoked by the sender. There is one 
   Transaction per request invocation. A request contains one or more 
   Actions, each of which specifies its target Context and one or more 
   Commands per Context. 

      TransactionRequest(TransactionId { 
         ContextID {Command ... Command},  


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 72] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            . . . 
         ContextID  {Command ... Command } }) 

   The TransactionID parameter must specify a value for later 
   correlation with the TransactionReply or TransactionPending response 
   from the receiver.  

   The ContextID parameter must specify a value to pertain to all 
   Commands that follow up to either the next specification of a 
   ContextID parameter or the end of the TransactionRequest, whichever 
   comes first.  

   The Command parameter represents one of the Commands mentioned in 7.2 
   (Command Application Programming Interface). 

.2.2 TransactionReply 

   The TransactionReply is invoked by the receiver. There is one reply 
   invocation per transaction. A reply contains one or more Actions, 
   each of which must specify its target Context and one or more 
   Responses per Context. The TransactionReply is invoked by the 
   responder when it has processed the TransactionRequest. 

   A TransactionRequest has been processed: 

   ò  when all actions in that TransactionRequest have been processed; 
      or 

   ò  when an error is encountered in processing that 
      TransactionRequest, except when the error is in an optional 
      command. 

   A command has been processed when all descriptors in that command 
   have been processed. 

   A SignalsDescriptor is considered to have been processed when it has 
   been established that the descriptor is syntactically valid, the 
   requested signals are supported and they have been queued to be 
   applied. 

   An EventsDescriptor or EventBufferDescriptor is considered to have 
   been processed when it has been established that the descriptor is 
   syntactically valid, the requested events can be observed, any 
   embedded signals can be generated, any embedded events can be 
   detected, and the MG has been brought into a state in which the 
   events will be detected. 

      TransactionReply(TransactionID { 
         ContextID { Response ... Response }, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 73] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            . . . 
         ContextID { Response ... Response } }) 

   The TransactionID parameter must be the same as that of the 
   corresponding TransactionRequest. 

   The ContextID parameter must specify a value to pertain to all 
   Responses for the action. The ContextID may be specific, all or null. 

   Each of the Response parameters represents a return value as 
   mentioned in 7.2, or an error descriptor if the command execution 
   encountered an error. Commands after the point of failure are not 
   processed and, therefore, Responses are not issued for them. 

   An exception to this occurs if a command has been marked as optional 
   in the Transaction request. If the optional command generates an 
   error, the transaction still continues to execute, so the Reply 
   would, in this case, have Responses after an Error. 

   Section 7.1.19 Error Descriptor specifies the generation of error 
   descriptors.  The text below discusses several individual cases. 

   If the receiver encounters an error in processing a ContextID, the 
   requested Action response will consist of the Context ID and a single 
   error descriptor, 422 - "Syntax Error in Action". 

   If the receiver encounters an error such that it cannot determine a 
   legal Action, it will return a TransactionReply consisting of the 
   TransactionID and a single error descriptor, 422 - "Syntax Error in 
   Action". If the end of an action cannot be reliably determined but 
   one or more commands can be parsed, it will process them and then 
   send 422 - "Syntax Error in Action" as the last action for the 
   transaction. If the receiver encounters an error such that is cannot 
   determine a legal Transaction, it will return a TransactionReply with 
   a null TransactionID and a single error descriptor (403 - "Syntax 
   Error in Transaction"). 

   If the end of a transaction cannot be reliably determined and one or 
   more Actions can be parsed, it will process them and then return 403 
   - "Syntax Error in Transaction" as the last action reply for the 
   transaction. If no Actions can be parsed, it will return 403 - 
   "Syntax Error in Transaction" as the only reply. 

   If the terminationID cannot be reliably determined, it will send 442 
   - "Syntax Error in Command" as the action reply. 

   If the end of a command cannot be reliably determined, it will return 
   442 - "Syntax Error in Command" as the reply to the last action it 
   can parse. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 74] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.3 TransactionPending 

   The receiver invokes the TransactionPending. A TransactionPending 
   indicates that the Transaction is actively being processed, but has 
   not been completed. It is used to prevent the sender from assuming 
   the TransactionRequest was lost where the Transaction will take some 
   time to complete. 

      TransactionPending(TransactionID { } ) 

   The TransactionID parameter must be the same as that of the 
   corresponding TransactionRequest. A property of root 
   (normalMGExecutionTime) is settable by the MGC to indicate the 
   interval within which the MGC expects a response to any transaction 
   from the MG. Another property (normalMGCExecutionTime) is settable by 
   the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MG SHOULD expect a 
   response to any transaction from the MGC. Senders may receive more 
   than one TransactionPending for a command. If a duplicate request is 
   received when pending, the responder may send a duplicate pending 
   immediately, or continue waiting for its timer to trigger another 
   TransactionPending. 

   A property of the root termination (MGOriginatedPendingLimit) is 
   settable by the MGC to indicate the number of TransactionPendings 
   that can be received from the MG. When the value expressed by this 
   property is exceeded, the MG shall stop the transaction processing 
   and send back a TransactionReply, otherwise the MGC can assume the 
   Transaction to be in error. 

   Another property of the root termination (MGCOriginatedPendingLimit) 
   is settable by the MGC to indicate the number of TransactionPendings 
   that can be received from the MGC. When the value expressed by this 
   property is exceeded, the MGC shall stop the transaction processing 
   and send back a TransactionReply otherwise the MG can assume the 
   Transaction to be in error. 

   The xxxOriginatedPendingLimit (MGOriginatedPendingLimit or 
   MGCOriginatedPendingLimit) may be exceeded either because of long 
   command processing or due to an error (e.g. a command caused a loop). 
   In both cases the receiver of the original TransactionRequest will 
   issue a TransactionReply with an error descriptor as a response 
   parameter in correspondence with either the offending long command or 
   the command that caused the error. Further commands in the 
   transaction shall not be processed. Error 506 - "Number of 
   TransactionPendings Exceeded" shall be used. 

   NOTE û To prevent a situation where the xxxOriginatedPendingLimit 
   (MGOriginatedPendingLimit or MGCOriginatedPendingLimit) is exceeded 
   due to an error and the receiver of the original TransactionRequest 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 75] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   keeps sending TransactionPending, the receiver of the original 
   TransactionRequest SHOULD implement a management protection mechanism 
   in order to trigger the appropriate recovery actions. The sender of 
   the original TransactionRequest may keep track of the number of 
   received Pendings and initiate corrective actions 

.3   Messages 

   Multiple Transactions can be concatenated into a Message. Messages 
   have a header, which includes the identity of the sender. The Message 
   Identifier (MID) of a message is set to a provisioned name (e.g. 
   domain address/domain name/device name) of the entity transmitting 
   the message. Domain name is a suggested default. An H.248.1 entity 
   (MG/MGC) must consistently use the same MID in all messages it 
   originates for the duration of control association with the peer 
   (MGC/MG). 

   Every Message contains a Version Number identifying the version of 
   the protocol the message conforms to. Versions consist of one or two 
   digits, beginning with version 1. The current version of the protocol 
   is Version 2. 

   The transactions in a message are treated independently. There is no 
   order implied; there is no application or protocol acknowledgement of 
   a message. A message is essentially a transport mechanism.  For 
   example, message X containing transaction requests A, B, and C may be 
   responded to with message Y containing replies to A and C and message 
   Z containing the reply to B. Likewise, message L containing request D 
   and message M containing request E may be responded to with message N 
   containing replies to both D and E. 

    
  TRANSPORT 

   The transport mechanism for the protocol SHOULD allow the reliable 
   transport of transactions between a MGC and MG. The transport shall 
   remain independent of what particular commands are being sent and 
   shall be applicable to all application states. There are several 
   transports defined for the protocol, which are defined in Annexes to 
   this Recommendation and other Recommendations of the H.248 sub-series 
   (e.g. H.248.4 and H.248.5). Additional Transports may be defined as 
   additional Recommendations of the H.248 sub-series. For transport of 
   the protocol over IP, MGCs shall implement both TCP and UDP/ALF, a MG 
   shall implement TCP or UDP/ALF or both. 

   The MG is provisioned with a name or address (such as DNS name or IP 
   address) of a primary and zero or more secondary MGCs (see 7.2.8) 
   that is the address the MG uses to send messages to the MGC. If TCP 
   or UDP is used as the protocol transport and the port to which the 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 76] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   initial ServiceChange request is to be sent is not otherwise known, 
   that request SHOULD be sent to the default port number for the 
   protocol. This port number is 2944 for text-encoded operation or 2945 
   for binary-encoded operation, for either UDP or TCP. The MGC receives 
   the message containing the ServiceChange request from the MG and can 
   determine the MG's address from it. As described in 7.2.8, either the 
   MG or the MGC may supply an address in the ServiceChangeAddress 
   parameter to which subsequent transaction requests must be addressed, 
   but responses (including the response to the initial ServiceChange 
   request) must always be sent back to the address which was the source 
   of the corresponding request. For example, in IP networks, this is 
   the source address in the IP header and the source port number in the 
   TCP/UDP/SCTP header. 

.1   Ordering of Commands 

   This Recommendation does not mandate that the underlying transport 
   protocol guarantees the sequencing of transactions sent to an entity. 
   This property tends to maximize the timeliness of actions, but it has 
   a few drawbacks. For example: 

   ò  Notify commands may be delayed and arrive at the MGC after the 
      transmission of a new command changing the EventsDescriptor. 

   ò  If a new command is transmitted before a previous one is 
      acknowledged, there is no guarantee that prior command will be 
      executed before the new one. 

   Media Gateway Controllers that want to guarantee consistent operation 
   of the Media Gateway may use the following rules. These rules are 
   with respect to commands that are in different transactions. Commands 
   that are in the same transaction are executed in order (see clause 
   8). 

   1) When a Media Gateway handles several Terminations, commands 
      pertaining to the different Terminations may be sent in parallel, 
      for example following a model where each Termination (or group of 
      Terminations) is controlled by its own process or its own thread. 

   2) On a Termination, there SHOULD normally be at most one outstanding 
      command (Add or Modify or Move), unless the outstanding commands 
      are in the same transaction. However, a Subtract command may be 
      issued at any time. In consequence, a Media Gateway may sometimes 
      receive a Modify command that applies to a previously subtracted 
      Termination. Such commands SHOULD be ignored, and an error code 
      SHOULD be returned. 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 77] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   3) For transports that do not guarantee in-sequence delivery of 
      messages (i.e. UDP), there SHOULD normally be on a given 
      Termination at most one outstanding Notify command at any time. 

   4) In some cases, an implicitly or explicitly wildcarded Subtract 
      command that applies to a group of Terminations may step in front 
      of a pending Add command. The Media Gateway Controller SHOULD 
      individually delete all Terminations for which an Add command was 
      pending at the time of the global Subtract command. Also, new Add 
      commands for Terminations named by the wildcarding (or implied in 
      a Multiplex descriptor) SHOULD not be sent until the wildcarded 
      Subtract command is acknowledged. 

   5) AuditValue and AuditCapability are not subject to any sequencing. 

   6) ServiceChange shall always be the first command sent by a MG as 
      defined by the restart procedure. Any other command or response 
      must be delivered after this ServiceChange command. 

   These rules do not affect the command responder, which SHOULD always 
   respond to commands. 

.2   Protection against Restart Avalanche 

   In the event that a large number of Media Gateways are powered on 
   simultaneously and they were to all initiate a ServiceChange 
   transaction, the Media Gateway Controller would very likely be 
   swamped, leading to message losses and network congestion during the 
   critical period of service restoration. In order to prevent such 
   avalanches, the following behaviour is suggested: 

   1) When a Media Gateway is powered on, it SHOULD initiate a restart 
      timer to a random value, uniformly distributed between 0 and a 
      maximum waiting delay (MWD). Care SHOULD be taken to avoid 
      synchronicity of the random number generation between multiple 
      Media Gateways that would use the same algorithm. 

   2) The Media Gateway SHOULD then wait for either the end of this 
      timer or the detection of a local user activity, such as for 
      example an off-hook transition on a residential Media Gateway. 

   3) When the timer elapses, or when an activity is detected, the Media 
      Gateway SHOULD initiate the restart procedure. 

   The restart procedure simply requires the MG to guarantee that the 
   first message that the Media Gateway Controller sees from this MG is 
   a ServiceChange message informing the Media Gateway Controller about 
   the restart. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 78] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   NOTE - The value of MWD is a configuration parameter that depends on 
   the type of the Media Gateway. The following reasoning may be used to 
   determine the value of this delay on residential gateways. 

   Media Gateway Controllers are typically dimensioned to handle the 
   peak hour traffic load, during which, in average, 10% of the lines 
   will be busy, placing calls whose average duration is typically 3 
   minutes. The processing of a call typically involves 5 to 6 Media 
   Gateway Controller transactions between each Media Gateway and the 
   Media Gateway Controller. This simple calculation shows that the 
   Media Gateway Controller is expected to handle 5 to 6 transactions 
   for each Termination, every 30 minutes on average, or, to put it 
   otherwise, about one transaction per Termination every 5 to 6 minutes 
   on average. This suggests that a reasonable value of MWD for a 
   residential gateway would be 10 to 12 minutes. In the absence of 
   explicit configuration, residential gateways SHOULD adopt a value of 
   600 seconds for MWD. 

   The same reasoning suggests that the value of MWD SHOULD be much 
   shorter for trunking gateways or for business gateways, because they 
   handle a large number of Terminations, and also because the usage 
   rate of these Terminations is much higher than 10% during the peak 
   busy hour, a typical value being 60%. These Terminations, during the 
   peak hour, are this expected to contribute about one transaction per 
   minute to the Media Gateway Controller load. A reasonable algorithm 
   is to make the value of MWD per "trunk" Termination six times shorter 
   than the MWD per residential gateway, and also inversely proportional 
   to the number of Terminations that are being restarted. For example 
   MWD SHOULD be set to 2.5 seconds for a gateway that handles a T1 
   line, or to 60 milliseconds for a gateway that handles a T3 line. 

    
0 SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS 

   This clause covers security when using the protocol in an IP 
   environment. 

0.1  Protection of Protocol Connections 

   A security mechanism is clearly needed to prevent unauthorized 
   entities from using the protocol defined in this Recommendation for 
   setting up unauthorized calls or interfering with authorized calls. 
   The security mechanism for the protocol when transported over IP 
   networks is IPsec [RFC 2401 to RFC 2411]. 

   The AH header [RFC 2402] affords data origin authentication, 
   connectionless integrity and optional anti-replay protection of 
   messages passed between the MG and the MGC. The ESP header [RFC 2406] 
   provides confidentiality of messages, if desired. For instance, the 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 79] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ESP encryption service SHOULD be requested if the session 
   descriptions are used to carry session keys, as defined in SDP. 

   Implementations of the protocol defined in this Recommendation 
   employing the ESP header SHALL comply with section 5 of [RFC 2406], 
   which defines a minimum set of algorithms for integrity checking and 
   encryption. Similarly, implementations employing the AH header SHALL 
   comply with section 5 of [RFC 2402], which defines a minimum set of 
   algorithms for integrity checking using manual keys. 

   Implementations SHOULD use IKE [RFC 2409] to permit more robust 
   keying options. Implementations employing IKE SHOULD support 
   authentication with RSA signatures and RSA public key encryption. 

0.2  Interim AH scheme 

   Implementation of IPsec requires that the AH or ESP header be 
   inserted immediately after the IP header. This cannot be easily done 
   at the application level. Therefore, this presents a deployment 
   problem for the protocol defined in this Recommendation where the 
   underlying network implementation does not support IPsec. 

   As an interim solution, an optional AH header is defined within the 
   H.248.1 protocol header. The header fields are exactly those of the 
   SPI, SEQUENCE NUMBER and DATA fields as defined in [RFC 2402]. The 
   semantics of the header fields are the same as the "transport mode" 
   of [RFC 2402], except for the calculation of the Integrity Check 
   Value (ICV). In IPsec, the ICV is calculated over the entire IP 
   packet including the IP header. This prevents spoofing of the IP 
   addresses. To retain the same functionality, the ICV calculation 
   SHOULD be performed across all the transactions (concatenated) in the 
   message prepended by a synthesized IP header consisting of a 32-bit 
   source IP address, a 32-bit destination address and a 16-bit UDP 
   destination port encoded as 20 hex digits. When the interim AH 
   mechanism is employed when TCP is the transport Layer, the UDP Port 
   above becomes the TCP port, and all other operations are the same. 

   Implementations of the H.248.1 protocol SHALL implement IPsec where 
   the underlying operating system and the transport network supports 
   IPsec. Implementations of the protocol using IPv4 SHALL implement the 
   interim AH scheme. However, this interim scheme SHALL NOT be used 
   when the underlying network layer supports IPsec. IPv6 
   implementations are assumed to support IPsec and SHALL NOT use the 
   interim AH scheme. 

   All implementations of the interim AH mechanism SHALL comply with 
   section 5 of RFC 2402 which defines a minimum set of algorithms for 
   integrity checking using manual keys.  



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 80] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The interim AH interim scheme does not provide protection against 
   eavesdropping, thus forbidding third parties from monitoring the 
   connections set up by a given Termination. Also, it does not provide 
   protection against replay attacks. These procedures do not 
   necessarily protect against denial of service attacks by misbehaving 
   MGs or misbehaving MGCs. However, they will provide an identification 
   of these misbehaving entities, which SHOULD then be deprived of their 
   authorization through maintenance procedures. 

0.3  Protection of Media Connections 

   The protocol allows the MGC to provide MGs with "session keys" that 
   can be used to encrypt the audio messages, protecting against 
   eavesdropping. 

   A specific problem of packet networks is "uncontrolled barge-in". 
   This attack can be performed by directing media packets to the IP 
   address and UDP port used by a connection. If no protection is 
   implemented, the packets must be decompressed and the signals must be 
   played on the "line side". 

   A basic protection against this attack is to only accept packets from 
   known sources, checking for example that the IP source address and 
   UDP source port match the values announced in the Remote descriptor. 
   This has two inconveniences: it slows down connection establishment 
   and it can be fooled by source spoofing: 

   ò  To enable the address-based protection, the MGC must obtain the 
      remote session description of the egress MG and pass it to the 
      ingress MG. This requires at least one network round trip, and 
      leaves us with a dilemma: either allow the call to proceed without 
      waiting for the round trip to complete, and risk for example, 
      "clipping" a remote announcement, or wait for the full round trip 
      and settle for slower call-set up procedures. 

   ò  Source spoofing is only effective if the attacker can obtain valid 
      pairs of source destination addresses and ports, for example by 
      listening to a fraction of the traffic. To fight source spoofing, 
      one could try to control all access points to the network. But 
      this is in practice very hard to achieve. 

   An alternative to checking the source address is to encrypt and 
   authenticate the packets, using a secret key that is conveyed during 
   the call set-up procedure. This will not slow down the call set-up, 
   and provides strong protection against address spoofing. 

    




roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 81] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


1 MG-MGC CONTROL INTERFACE  

   The control association between MG and MGC is initiated at MG cold 
   start, and announced by a ServiceChange message, but can be changed 
   by subsequent events, such as failures or manual service events.  

   NOTE - While the protocol does not have an explicit mechanism to 
   support multiple MGCs controlling a physical MG, it has been designed 
   to support the multiple logical MG (within a single physical MG) that 
   can be associated with different MGCs. 

1.1  Multiple Virtual MGs 

   A physical Media Gateway may be partitioned into one or more Virtual 
   MGs. A virtual MG consists of a set of statically partitioned 
   physical Terminations and/or sets of ephemeral Terminations. A 
   physical Termination is controlled by one MGC. The model does not 
   require that other resources be statically allocated, just 
   Terminations. The mechanism for allocating Terminations to virtual 
   MGs is a management method outside the scope of the protocol. Each of 
   the virtual MGs appears to the MGC as a complete MG client. 

   A physical MG may have only one network interface, which must be 
   shared across virtual MGs. In such a case, the packet/cell side 
   Termination is shared. It SHOULD be noted however, that in use, such 
   interfaces require an ephemeral instance of the Termination to be 
   created per flow, and thus sharing the Termination is 
   straightforward. This mechanism does lead to a complication, namely 
   that the MG must always know which of its controlling MGCs SHOULD be 
   notified if an event occurs on the interface. 

   In normal operation, the Virtual MG will be instructed by the MGC to 
   create network flows (if it is the originating side), or to expect 
   flow requests (if it is the terminating side), and no confusion will 
   arise. However, if an unexpected event occurs, the Virtual MG must 
   know what to do with respect to the physical resources it is 
   controlling. 

   If recovering from the event requires manipulation of a physical 
   interface's state, only one MGC SHOULD do so. These issues are 
   resolved by allowing any of the MGCs to create EventsDescriptors to 
   be notified of such events, but only one MGC can have read/write 
   access to the physical interface properties; all other MGCs have 
   read-only access. The management mechanism is used to designate which 
   MGC has read/write capability, and is designated the Master MGC. 

   Each virtual MG has its own Root Termination. In most cases the 
   values for the properties of the Root Termination are independently 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 82] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   settable by each MGC. Where there can only be one value, the 
   parameter is read-only to all but the Master MGC. 

   ServiceChange may only be applied to a Termination or set of 
   Terminations partitioned to the Virtual MG or created (in the case of 
   ephemeral Terminations) by that Virtual MG. 

1.2  Cold start 

   A MG is pre-provisioned by a management mechanism outside the scope 
   of this protocol with a primary and (optionally) an ordered list of 
   secondary MGCs. Upon a cold start of the MG, it will issue a 
   ServiceChange command with a "Restart" method, on the Root 
   Termination to its primary MGC. If the MGC accepts the MG, it sends a 
   Transaction Reply not including a ServiceChangeMgcId parameter. If 
   the MGC does not accept the MGÆs registration, it sends a Transaction 
   Reply, providing the address of an alternate MGC to be contacted by 
   including a ServiceChangeMgcId parameter. 

   If the MG receives a Transaction Reply that includes a 
   ServiceChangeMgcId parameter, it sends a ServiceChange to the MGC 
   specified in the ServiceChangeMgcId. It continues this process until 
   it gets a controlling MGC to accept its registration, or it fails to 
   get a reply. Upon failure to obtain a reply, either from the primary 
   MGC, or a designated successor, the MG tries its pre-provisioned 
   secondary MGCs, in order. If the MG is unable to establish a control 
   relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random amount of time as 
   described in 9.2 and then start contacting its primary, and if 
   necessary, its secondary MGCs again. 

   It is possible that the reply to a ServiceChange with Restart will be 
   lost, and a command will be received by the MG prior to the receipt 
   of the ServiceChange response. The MG shall issue Error 505 û Command 
   Received before Restart Response. 

1.3  Negotiation of protocol version 

   A ServiceChange command from a MG that registers with an MGC shall 
   contain the version number of the protocol supported by the MG in the 
   ServiceChangeVersion parameter. Regardless of the version placed in 
   the ServiceChangeVersion parameter the message containing the command 
   shall be encoded as a version 1 message. Upon receiving such a 
   message, if the MGC supports only a lower version, then the MGC shall 
   send a ServiceChangeReply with the lower version and thereafter all 
   the messages between MG and MGC shall conform to the lower version of 
   the protocol. If the MG is unable to comply and it has established a 
   transport connection to the MGC, it SHOULD close that connection. In 
   any event, it SHOULD reject all subsequent requests from the MGC with 
   Error 406 - "Version Not Supported". 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 83] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   If the MGC supports a higher version than the MG but is able to 
   support the lower version proposed by the MG, it shall send a 
   ServiceChangeReply with the lower version and thereafter all the 
   messages between MG and MGC shall conform to the lower version of the 
   protocol. If the MGC is unable to comply, it shall reject the 
   association, with Error 406 - "Version Not Supported". 

   Protocol version negotiation may also occur at "handoff" and 
   "failover" ServiceChanges. 

   When extending the protocol with new versions, the following rules 
   SHOULD be followed: 

   1) Existing protocol elements, i.e. procedures, parameters, 
      descriptor, property, values, SHOULD not be changed unless a 
      protocol error needs to be corrected or it becomes necessary to 
      change the operation of the service that is being supported by the 
      protocol. 

   2) The semantics of a command, a parameter, a descriptor, a property, 
      or a value SHOULD not be changed. 

   3) Established rules for formatting and encoding messages and 
      parameters SHOULD not be modified. 

   4) When information elements are found to be obsolete they can be 
      marked as not used. However, the identifier for that information 
      element will be marked as reserved. In that way it can not be used 
      in future versions. 

1.4  Failure of a MG 

   If a MG fails, but is capable of sending a message to the MGC, it 
   sends a ServiceChange with an appropriate method (graceful or forced) 
   and specifies the Root TerminationID. When it returns to service, it 
   sends a ServiceChange with a "Restart" method. 

   Allowing the MGC to send duplicate messages to both MGs accommodates 
   pairs of MGs that are capable of redundant failover of one of the 
   MGs. Only the Working MG shall accept or reject transactions. Upon 
   failover, the primary MG sends a ServiceChange command with a 
   "Failover" method and a "MG Impending Failure" reason. The MGC then 
   uses the secondary MG as the active MG. When the error condition is 
   repaired, the Working MG can send a "ServiceChange" with a "Restart" 
   method. 

   Note: Redundant failover MGs require a reliable transport, because 
   the protocol provides no means for a secondary MG running ALF to 
   acknowledge messages sent from the MGC. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 84] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


1.5  Failure of an MGC 

   If the MG detects a failure of its controlling MGC, it attempts to 
   contact the next MGC on its pre-provisioned list. It starts its 
   attempts at the beginning (primary MGC), unless that was the MGC that 
   failed, in which case it starts at its first secondary MGC. It sends 
   a ServiceChange message with a "Failover" method and a " MGC 
   Impending Failure" reason. If the MG is unable to establish a control 
   relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random amount of time as 
   described in section 9.2 and then start again contacting its primary, 
   and (if necessary) its secondary MGCs. When contacting its previously 
   controlling MGC, the MG sends the ServiceChange message with 
   "Disconnected" method. 

   In partial failure, or for manual maintenance reasons, an MGC may 
   wish to direct its controlled MGs to use a different MGC. To do so, 
   it sends a ServiceChange method to the MG with a "HandOff" method, 
   and its designated replacement in ServiceChangeMgcId. If "HandOff" is 
   supported, the MG shall send a ServiceChange message with a "Handoff" 
   method and a "MGC directed change" reason to the designated MGC. If 
   it fails to get a reply from the designated MGC, the MG shall behave 
   as if its MGC failed, and start contacting secondary MGCs as 
   specified in the previous paragraph. If the MG is unable to establish 
   a control relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random amount of 
   time as described in 9.2 and then start contacting its primary, and 
   if necessary, its secondary MGCs again. 

   No recommendation is made on how the MGCs involved in the Handoff 
   maintain state information; this is considered to be out of scope of 
   this Recommendation. The MGC and MG may take the following steps when 
   Handoff occurs. When the MGC initiates a HandOff, the handover SHOULD 
   be transparent to Operations on the Media Gateway. Transactions can 
   be executed in any order, and could be in progress when the 
   ServiceChange is executed. Accordingly, commands in progress continue 
   and replies to all commands from the original MGC must be sent to the 
   transport address from which they were sent. If the service 
   relationship with the sending MGC has ended, the replies SHOULD be 
   discarded. The MG may receive outstanding transaction replies from 
   the new MGC. No new messages shall be sent to the new MGC until the 
   control association is established. Repeated transaction requests 
   shall be directed to the new MGC. The MG shall maintain state on all 
   Terminations and Contexts. 

   It is possible that the MGC could be implemented in such a way that a 
   failed MGC is replaced by a working MGC where the identity of the new 
   MGC is the same as the failed one. In such a case, ServiceChangeMgcId 
   would be specified with the previous value and the MG shall behave as 
   if the value was changed, and send a ServiceChange message, as above. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 85] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Pairs of MGCs that are capable of redundant failover can notify the 
   controlled MGs of the failover by the above mechanism. 

    
2 PACKAGE DEFINITION 

   The primary mechanism for extension is by means of Packages. Packages 
   define additional Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics that may 
   occur on Terminations. 

   Packages defined by IETF will appear in separate RFCs. 

   Packages defined by ITU-T may appear in the relevant Recommendations 
   (e.g. as Recommendations of the H.248 sub-series). 

   1) A public document or a standard forum document, which can be 
      referenced as the document that describes the package following 
      the guideline above, SHOULD be specified.  

   2) The document shall specify the version of the Package that it 
      describes. 

   3) The document SHOULD be available on a public web server and SHOULD 
      have a stable URL. The site SHOULD provide a mechanism to provide 
      comments and appropriate responses SHOULD be returned. 

2.1  Guidelines for defining packages 

   Packages define Properties, Events, Signals, and Statistics. 

   Packages may also define new error codes according to the guidelines 
   given in 13.2. This is a matter of documentary convenience: the 
   package documentation is submitted to IANA in support of the error 
   code registration. If a package is modified, it is unnecessary to 
   provide IANA with a new document reference in support of the error 
   code unless the description of the error code itself is modified. 

   Names of all such defined constructs shall consist of the PackageID 
   (which uniquely identifies the package) and the ID of the item (which 
   uniquely identifies the item in that package). In the text encoding 
   the two shall be separated by a forward slash ("/") character. 
   Example: togen/playtone is the text encoding to refer to the play 
   tone signal in the tone generation package. 

   A Package will contain the following sections: 

2.1.1   Package 

   Overall description of the package, specifying: 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 86] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Package Name: only descriptive 

      PackageID: is an identifier 

      Description:  

      Version:  

   A new version of a package can only add additional Properties, 
   Events, Signals, Statistics and new possible values for an existing 
   parameter described in the original package. No deletions or 
   modifications shall be allowed. A version is an integer in the range 
   from 1 to 99. 

      Designed to be extended only (Optional): Yes 

   This indicates that the package has been expressly designed to be 
   extended by others, not to be directly referenced. For example, the 
   package may not have any function on its own or be nonsensical on its 
   own. The MG SHOULD NOT publish this PackageID when reporting 
   packages. 

      Extends (Optional): existing package Descriptor 

   A package may extend an existing package. The version of the original 
   package must be specified. When a package extends another package it 
   shall only add additional Properties, Events, Signals, Statistics and 
   new possible values for an existing parameter described in the 
   original package. An extended package shall not redefine or overload 
   an identifier defined in the original package and packages it may 
   have extended (multiple levels of extension). Hence, if package B 
   version 1 extends package A version 1, version 2 of B will not be 
   able to extend the A version 2 if A version 2 defines a name already 
   in B version 1. 

2.1.2   Properties 

   Properties defined by the package, specifying: 

      Property Name: only descriptive 

      PropertyID: is an identifier 

      Description: 

      Type: One of: 

         Boolean 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 87] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         String: UTF-8 string 

         Octet String: A number of octets.  See Annex A and Annex B.3 
         for encoding 

         Integer: 4 byte signed integer 

         Double: 8 byte signed integer 

         Character: unicode UTF-8 encoding of a single letter. Could be 
         more than one octet. 

         Enumeration: one of a list of possible unique values (see 12.3) 

         Sub-list: a list of several values from a list. The type of 
         sub-list SHALL also be specified.  The type shall be chosen 
         from the types specified in this section (with the exception of 
         sub-list). For example, Type: sub-list of enumeration.  The 
         encoding of sub-lists is specified in Annexes A and B.3. 

      Possible values: 

   A package MUST specify either a specific set of values or a 
   description of how values are determined.  A package MUST also 
   specify a default value or the default behaviour when the value is 
   omitted from its descriptor.  For example, a package may specify that 
   procedures related to the property are suspended when it value is 
   omitted.  A default value (but not procedures) may be specified as 
   provisionable. 

      Defined in: 

   Which H.248.1 descriptor the property is defined in. LocalControl is 
   for stream dependent properties. TerminationState is for stream 
   independent properties. These are expected to be the most common 
   cases, but it is possible for properties to be defined in other 
   descriptors. 

      Characteristics: Read/Write or both, and (optionally), global:  

   Indicates whether a property is read-only, or read-write, and if it 
   is global. If Global is omitted, the property is not global. If a 
   property is declared as global, the value of the property is shared 
   by all Terminations realizing the package. 

2.1.3   Events 

   Events defined by the package, specifying: 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 88] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Event name: only descriptive 

      EventID: is an identifier 

      Description: 

      EventsDescriptor Parameters:  

   Parameters used by the MGC to configure the event, and found in the 
   EventsDescriptor. See 12.2. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor Parameters:  

   Parameters returned to the MGC in Notify requests and in replies to 
   command requests from the MGC that audit ObservedEventsDescriptor, 
   and found in the ObservedEventsDescriptor. See 12.2. 

2.1.4   Signals 

   Signals defined by the package, specifying: 

      Signal Name: only descriptive 

      SignalID: is an identifier. SignalID is used in a 
      SignalsDescriptor 

      Description 

      SignalType: one of: 

            OO (On/Off)  

            TO (TimeOut) 

            BR (Brief) 

   NOTE - SignalType may be defined such that it is dependent on the 
   value of one or more parameters. The package MUST specify a default 
   signal type.  If the default type is TO, the package MUST specify a 
   default duration which may be provisioned.  A default duration is 
   meaningless for BR.  

      Duration: in hundredths of seconds 

      Additional Parameters: see 12.2 

2.1.5   Statistics 

   Statistics defined by the package, specifying: 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 89] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Statistic name: only descriptive 

      StatisticID: is an identifier 

   StatisticID is used in a StatisticsDescriptor 

      Description: 

      Units: unit of measure, e.g. milliseconds, packets 

2.1.6   Procedures 

   Additional guidance on the use of the package. 

    
2.2  Guidelines to defining Parameters to Events and Signals 

      Parameter Name: only descriptive 

      ParameterID: is an identifier. The textual ParameterID of 
      parameters to Events and Signals shall not start with "EPA" and 
      "SPA", respectively. The textual ParameterID shall also not be 
      "ST", "Stream", "SY", "SignalType", "DR", "Duration", "NC", 
      "NotifyCompletion", "KA", "Keepactive", "EB", "Embed", "DM" or 
      "DigitMap". 

      Type: One of: 

         Boolean 

         String: UTF-8 octet string 

         Octet String: A number of octets.  See Annex A and Annex B.3 
         for encoding 

         Integer: 4-octet signed integer 

         Double: 8-octet signed integer 

         Character: unicode UTF-8 encoding of a single letter. Could be 
         more than one octet. 

         Enumeration: one of a list of possible unique values (see 12.3) 

         Sub-list: a list of several values from a list (not supported 
         for statistics). The type of sub-list SHALL also be specified.  
         The type shall be chosen from the types specified in this 
         section (with the exception of sub-list). For example, Type: 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 90] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         sub-list of enumeration.  The encoding of sub-lists is 
         specified in Annexes A and B.3. 

      Possible values: 

   A package MUST specify either a specific set of values or a 
   description of how values are determined.  A package MUST also 
   specify a default value or the default behavior when the value is 
   omitted from its descriptor.  For example, a package may specify that 
   procedures related to the parameter are suspended when it value is 
   omitted.  A default value (but not procedures) may be specified as 
   provisionable. 

      Description: 

2.3  Lists 

   Possible values for parameters include enumerations. Enumerations may 
   be defined in a list. It is recommended that the list be IANA 
   registered so that packages that extend the list can be defined 
   without concern for conflicting names. 

2.4  Identifiers 

   Identifiers in text encoding shall be strings of up to 64 characters, 
   containing no spaces, starting with an alphabetic character and 
   consisting of alphanumeric characters and/or digits, and possibly 
   including the special character underscore ("_"). 

   Identifiers in binary encoding are 2 octets long. 

   Both text and binary values shall be specified for each identifier, 
   including identifiers used as values in enumerated types. 

2.5  Package registration 

   A package can be registered with IANA for interoperability reasons. 
   See clause 13 for IANA considerations. 

    
3 PROFILE DEFINITION 

   Profiles may be specified to further define how the H.248.1 protocol 
   is used and what functionality is supported by a MG. The profile 
   itself specifies what options associated with H.248.1 have been used. 
   For example: transport and packages used for an application.  





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 91] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   A profile is identified by a name (IANA registered) and a Version. A 
   name shall be a string up to 64 characters long. Version shall be 1 
   to 99. 

   The profile itself is a document that indicates the options for a 
   particular application. There is no set format for this document. The 
   only mandatory element is that there SHOULD be a section indicating 
   the Name and Version and a summary of the profile. 

   Whilst the first two points below are the only mandatory sections, 
   the following points SHOULD be considered for inclusion: 

   ò  Profile Identification: The name and version of the profile that 
      is sent in the service change command. 

   ò  Summary: A description of what the profile is. 

   ò  Naming Conventions: 

      - MGC/MG Naming Conventions: Addressing associated with the names 
         of the MGC / MG. 

      - Termination Names: The termination identity structure. 

      - Digit Map Names: The names of any digit maps. 

   ò  Topology Descriptor: Is the topology descriptor used by this 
      profile? 

   ò  TimeStamps: Specifies whether timestamps will be used in the 
      ServiceChange and/or Notify commands. 

   ò  Transaction Timers: Specifies the values of the transaction 
      timers. 

   ò  Transport: Specifies what H.248 sub-series transports are 
      supported by the profile. 

   ò  Encoding: Specifies what encoding is supported by the profile.  

   ò  Mandatory support of SDP and H.248.1 Annex C information elements: 
      Specifies what SDP attributes and H.248.1 Annex C information 
      elements are to be supported. 

   ò  Packages: Specifies the packages that are supported in this 
      profile. 

   Mandatory: specifies the packages that shall be supported in this 
   profile. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 92] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Optional: specifies the packages that may be supported in the 
   profile. 

   Package Provisioning Information: specifies the values of properties 
   which are specified as provisioned (e.g. names and number of cycles 
   for an H.248.7 announcement). 

   ò  Security: Specifies the security mechanisms used. 

   ò  Procedures: Specifies the procedures that are associated with the 
      profile. 

    
4 IANA CONSIDERATIONS 

4.1  Packages 

   The following considerations SHALL be met to register a package with 
   IANA: 

   1) A unique string name, unique serial number and version number is 
      registered for each package. The string name is used with text 
      encoding. The serial number shall be used with binary encoding. 
      Serial Numbers 0x8000 to 0xFFFF are reserved for private use. 
      Serial number 0 is reserved. 

   2) A contact name, email and postal addresses for that contact shall 
      be specified. The contact information shall be updated by the 
      defining organization as necessary. 

   3) A reference to a document that describes the package, which SHOULD 
      be public:  

      The document shall specify the version of the Package that it 
      describes. 

      If the document is public, it SHOULD be located on a public web 
      server and SHOULD have a stable URL. The site SHOULD provide a 
      mechanism to provide comments and appropriate responses SHOULD be 
      returned. 

   4) Packages registered by other than recognized standards bodies 
      shall have a minimum package name length of 8 characters. 

   5) All other package names are first come-first served if all other 
      conditions are met. 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 93] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


4.2  Error codes 

   The following considerations SHALL be met to register an error code 
   with IANA: 

   1) An error number and a one-line (80-character maximum) string is 
      registered for each error. 

   2) A complete description of the conditions under which the error is 
      detected shall be included in a publicly available document. The 
      description shall be sufficiently clear to differentiate the error 
      from all other existing error codes. 

   3) The document SHOULD be available on a public web server and SHOULD 
      have a stable URL. 

   4) Error numbers registered by recognized standards bodies shall have 
      3- or 4-character error numbers. 

   5) Error numbers registered by all other organizations or individuals 
      shall have 4-character error numbers. 

   6) An error number shall not be redefined nor modified except by the 
      organization or individual that originally defined it, or their 
      successors or assigns. 

4.3  ServiceChange reasons 

   The following considerations SHALL be met to register service change 
   reason with IANA: 

   1) A one-phrase, 80-character maximum, unique reason code is 
      registered for each reason. 

   2) A complete description of the conditions under which the reason is 
      used is detected shall be included in a publicly available 
      document. The description shall be sufficiently clear to 
      differentiate the reason from all other existing reasons.  

   3) The document SHOULD be available on a public web server and SHOULD 
      have a stable URL.  

4.4  Profiles 

   The following considerations SHALL be met to register a Profile with 
   IANA: 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 94] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   1) A unique string name and version number (version may be omitted 
      when the profile name contains a wildcard) is registered for each 
      profile.   

   2) A contact name, email and postal addresses for that contact shall 
      be specified.  The contact information shall be updated by the 
      defining organization as necessary.  

   3) Profiles registered by other than recognized standards bodies 
      shall have a minimum profile name length of 6 characters. 

   4) Profile names containing a wildcard "*"on the end of their names 
      shall be accepted if the first 6 characters are fully specified. 
      It is assumed that the organisation that was issued with the 
      Profile name will manage the namespace associated with the 
      wildcard. IANA shall not issue other profiles names within "name*" 
      range. 

   All other Profile names are first come-first served if all other 
   conditions are met. 































roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 95] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


NNEX A  BINARY ENCODING OF THE PROTOCOL 

   This annex specifies the syntax of messages using the notation 
   defined in Recommendation X.680; Information technology - Abstract 
   Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Specification of basic notation. 
   Messages shall be encoded for transmission by applying the basic 
   encoding rules specified in Recommendation X.690, Information 
   Technology - ASN.1 Encoding Rules: Specification of Basic Encoding 
   Rules (BER), Canonical Encoding Rules (CER) and Distinguished 
   Encoding Rules. 

.1   Coding of wildcards 

   The use of wildcards ALL and CHOOSE is allowed in the protocol. This 
   allows a MGC to partially specify Termination IDs and to let the MG 
   choose from the values that conform to the partial specification. 
   Termination IDs may encode a hierarchy of names. This hierarchy is 
   provisioned. For instance, a TerminationID may consist of a trunk 
   group, a trunk within the group and a circuit. Wildcarding must be 
   possible at all levels. The following paragraphs explain how this is 
   achieved. 

   The ASN.1 description uses octet strings of up to 8 octets in length 
   for Termination IDs. This means that Termination IDs consist of at 
   most 64 bits. A fully specified Termination ID may be preceded by a 
   sequence of wildcarding fields. A wildcarding field is one octet in 
   length. Bit 7 (the most significant bit) of this octet specifies what 
   type of wildcarding is invoked: if the bit value equals 1, then the 
   ALL wildcard is used; if the bit value if 0, then the CHOOSE wildcard 
   is used. Bit 6 of the wildcarding field specifies whether the 
   wildcarding pertains to one level in the hierarchical naming scheme 
   (bit value 0) or to the level of the hierarchy specified in the 
   wildcarding field plus all lower levels (bit value 1). Bits 0 through 
   5 of the wildcarding field specify the bit position in the 
   Termination ID at which the wildcarding starts. 

   We illustrate this scheme with some examples. In these examples, the 
   most significant bit in a string of bits appears on the left hand 
   side. 

   Assume that Termination IDs are three octets long and that each octet 
   represents a level in a hierarchical naming scheme. A valid 
   Termination ID is: 

      00000001 00011110 01010101. 

   Addressing ALL names with prefix 00000001 00011110 is done as 
   follows: 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 96] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      wildcarding field: 10000111 

      Termination ID: 00000001 00011110 xxxxxxxx. 

   The values of the bits labeled "x" is irrelevant and shall be ignored 
   by the receiver. 

   Indicating to the receiver that it must choose a name with 00011110 
   as the second octet is done as follows: 

      wildcarding fields: 00010111 followed by 00000111 

      Termination ID: xxxxxxxx 00011110 xxxxxxxx. 

   The first wildcard field indicates a CHOOSE wildcard for the level in 
   the naming hierarchy starting at bit 23, the highest level in our 
   assumed naming scheme. The second wildcard field indicates a CHOOSE 
   wildcard for the level in the naming hierarchy starting at bit 7, the 
   lowest level in our assumed naming scheme. 

   Finally, a CHOOSE-wildcarded name with the highest level of the name 
   equal to 00000001 is specified as follows: 

      wildcard field: 01001111 

      Termination ID: 0000001 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx . 

   Bit value 1 at bit position 6 of the first octet of the wildcard 
   field indicates that the wildcarding pertains to the specified level 
   in the naming hierarchy and all lower levels. 

   Context IDs may also be wildcarded. In the case of Context IDs, 
   however, specifying partial names is not allowed. Context ID 0x0 
   SHALL be used to indicate the NULL Context, Context ID 0xFFFFFFFE 
   SHALL be used to indicate a CHOOSE wildcard, and Context ID 
   0xFFFFFFFF SHALL be used to indicate an ALL wildcard. 

   TerminationID 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF SHALL be used to indicate the ROOT 
   Termination. 

.2   ASN.1 syntax specification 

   This subclause contains the ASN.1 specification of the H.248.1 
   protocol syntax. 

   NOTE 1 - In case a transport mechanism is used that employs 
   application level framing, the definition of Transaction below 
   changes. Refer to the annex or to the Recommendation of the H.248 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 97] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   sub-series defining the transport mechanism for the definition that 
   applies in that case. 

   NOTE 2 û The ASN.1 specification below contains a clause defining 
   TerminationIDList as a sequence of TerminationIDs. The length of this 
   sequence SHALL be one, except possibly when used in 
   contextAuditResult. 

   NOTE 3 û This syntax specification does not enforce all restrictions 
   on element inclusions and values.  Some additional restrictions are 
   stated in comments and other restrictions appear in the text of this 
   recommendation.  These additional restrictions are part of the 
   protocol even though not enforced by this specification. 

   NOTE 4 û The ASN.1 module in this Annex uses octet string types to 
   encode values for property parameter, signal parameter and event 
   parameter values and statistics. The actual types of these values 
   vary and are specified in Annex C or the relevant package definition. 

   A value is first BER-encoded based on its type using the table below.  
   The result of this BER-encoding is then encoded as an ASN.1 octet 
   string, "double wrapping" the value. The format specified in Annex C 
   or the package relates to BER encoding according to the following 
   table: 

       Type Specified in Package   ASN.1 BER Type 

       String                      IA5String or UTF8String 
                                   (Note 4) 

       Integer (4 Octet)           INTEGER 

       Double (8 octet signed int) INTEGER (Note 3) 

       Character (UTF-8, Note 1)   IA5String 

       Enumeration                 ENUMERATED 

       Boolean                     BOOLEAN 

       Unsigned Integer (Note 2)   INTEGER  (Note 3) 

       Octet (String)              OCTET STRING 

       Note 1: Can be more than one byte 

       Note 2: Unsigned integer is referenced in Annex C 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 98] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


       Note 3: The BER encoding of INTEGER does not imply the 
       use of 4 bytes. 

       Note 4: String SHOULD be encoded as IA5String when the 
       contents are all ASCII characters, but as UTF8String 
       if it contains any non-ASCII characters. 

    

   See ITU-T Rec. X.690, 8.7, for the definition of the encoding of an 
   octet string value. 

    
   MEDIA-GATEWAY-CONTROL {itu-t(0) recommendation(0) h(8) h248(248) 
   modules(0) media-gateway-control(0) version2(2)} 
   DEFINITIONS AUTOMATIC TAGS ::= 
   BEGIN 
    
    
   MegacoMessage ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      authHeader     AuthenticationHeader OPTIONAL, 
      mess           Message 
   } 
    
   AuthenticationHeader ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      secParmIndex   SecurityParmIndex, 
      seqNum         SequenceNum, 
      ad             AuthData 
   } 
    
   SecurityParmIndex ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4)) 
    
   SequenceNum       ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4)) 
    
   AuthData          ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE (12..32)) 
    
   Message ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      version           INTEGER(0..99), 
      -- The version of the protocol defined here is equal to 2. 
      mId               MId,  -- Name/address of message originator 
      messageBody CHOICE 
      { 
         messageError      ErrorDescriptor, 
         transactions      SEQUENCE OF Transaction 
      }, 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003                [Page 99] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      ... 
   } 
    
   MId ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      ip4Address           IP4Address, 
      ip6Address           IP6Address, 
      domainName           DomainName, 
      deviceName           PathName, 
      mtpAddress           OCTET STRING(SIZE(2..4)), 
       -- Addressing structure of mtpAddress: 
       --     25 - 15              0 
       --     |  PC           | NI | 
       --     24 - 14 bits    2 bits 
   -- Note: 14 bits are defined for international use. 
   -- Two national options exist where the point code is 16 or 24   
    -- bits. 
    -- To octet align the mtpAddress, the MSBs shall be encoded as 0s. 
      ... 
   } 
    
   DomainName ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      name        IA5String, 
      -- The name starts with an alphanumeric digit followed by a 
      -- sequence of alphanumeric digits, hyphens and dots.  No two 
      -- dots shall occur consecutively. 
      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   IP4Address ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      address        OCTET STRING (SIZE(4)), 
      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   IP6Address ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      address        OCTET STRING (SIZE(16)), 
      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   PathName ::= IA5String(SIZE (1..64)) 
   -- See A.3 
    
   Transaction ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      transactionRequest      TransactionRequest, 
      transactionPending      TransactionPending, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 100] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      transactionReply        TransactionReply, 
      transactionResponseAck  TransactionResponseAck, 
         -- use of response acks is dependent on underlying transport 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TransactionId ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295)  -- 32-bit unsigned integer 
    
   TransactionRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      transactionId        TransactionId, 
      actions              SEQUENCE OF ActionRequest, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TransactionPending ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      transactionId        TransactionId, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TransactionReply ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      transactionId        TransactionId, 
      immAckRequired       NULL OPTIONAL, 
      transactionResult    CHOICE 
      { 
           transactionError   ErrorDescriptor, 
           actionReplies      SEQUENCE OF ActionReply 
      }, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TransactionResponseAck ::= SEQUENCE OF TransactionAck 
   TransactionAck ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      firstAck       TransactionId, 
      lastAck        TransactionId OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   ErrorDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      errorCode      ErrorCode, 
      errorText      ErrorText OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   ErrorCode ::= INTEGER(0..65535) 
   -- See clause 14 for IANA considerations with respect to error codes 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 101] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ErrorText ::= IA5String 
    
   ContextID ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295) 
    
   -- Context NULL Value: 0 
   -- Context CHOOSE Value: 4294967294 (0xFFFFFFFE)  
   -- Context ALL Value: 4294967295 (0xFFFFFFFF) 
    
    
   ActionRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      contextId            ContextID, 
      contextRequest       ContextRequest OPTIONAL, 
      contextAttrAuditReq  ContextAttrAuditRequest OPTIONAL, 
      commandRequests      SEQUENCE OF CommandRequest 
   } 
    
   ActionReply ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      contextId         ContextID, 
      errorDescriptor   ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      contextReply      ContextRequest OPTIONAL, 
      commandReply      SEQUENCE OF CommandReply 
   } 
    
   ContextRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      priority       INTEGER(0..15) OPTIONAL, 
      emergency      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      topologyReq    SEQUENCE OF TopologyRequest OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ContextAttrAuditRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      topology    NULL OPTIONAL, 
      emergency   NULL OPTIONAL, 
      priority    NULL OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   CommandRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      command           Command, 
      optional          NULL OPTIONAL, 
      wildcardReturn    NULL OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 102] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Command ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      addReq               AmmRequest, 
      moveReq              AmmRequest, 
      modReq               AmmRequest, 
      -- Add, Move, Modify requests have the same parameters 
      subtractReq          SubtractRequest, 
      auditCapRequest      AuditRequest, 
      auditValueRequest    AuditRequest, 
      notifyReq            NotifyRequest, 
      serviceChangeReq     ServiceChangeRequest, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   CommandReply ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      addReply                AmmsReply, 
      moveReply               AmmsReply, 
      modReply                AmmsReply, 
      subtractReply           AmmsReply, 
      -- Add, Move, Modify, Subtract replies have the same parameters 
      auditCapReply           AuditReply, 
      auditValueReply         AuditReply, 
      notifyReply             NotifyReply, 
      serviceChangeReply      ServiceChangeReply, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TopologyRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationFrom         TerminationID, 
      terminationTo           TerminationID, 
      topologyDirection       ENUMERATED 
      { 
         bothway(0), 
         isolate(1), 
         oneway(2) 
      }, 
      ..., 
      streamID             StreamID OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   AmmRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID        TerminationIDList, 
      descriptors          SEQUENCE OF AmmDescriptor, 
      -- At most one descriptor of each type (see AmmDescriptor) 
      -- allowed in the sequence. 
      ... 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 103] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   } 
    
   AmmDescriptor ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      mediaDescriptor         MediaDescriptor, 
      modemDescriptor         ModemDescriptor, 
      muxDescriptor           MuxDescriptor, 
      eventsDescriptor        EventsDescriptor, 
      eventBufferDescriptor   EventBufferDescriptor, 
      signalsDescriptor       SignalsDescriptor, 
      digitMapDescriptor      DigitMapDescriptor, 
      auditDescriptor         AuditDescriptor, 
      ... 
   } 
    
    
   AmmsReply ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID        TerminationIDList, 
      terminationAudit     TerminationAudit OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   SubtractRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID        TerminationIDList, 
      auditDescriptor      AuditDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   AuditRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID        TerminationID, 
      auditDescriptor      AuditDescriptor, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   AuditReply ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      contextAuditResult   TerminationIDList, 
      error                ErrorDescriptor, 
      auditResult          AuditResult, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   AuditResult ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
    
      terminationID           TerminationID, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 104] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      terminationAuditResult  TerminationAudit 
   } 
    
    
    
   TerminationAudit ::= SEQUENCE OF AuditReturnParameter 
    
   AuditReturnParameter ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      errorDescriptor            ErrorDescriptor, 
      mediaDescriptor            MediaDescriptor, 
      modemDescriptor            ModemDescriptor, 
      muxDescriptor              MuxDescriptor, 
      eventsDescriptor           EventsDescriptor, 
      eventBufferDescriptor      EventBufferDescriptor, 
      signalsDescriptor          SignalsDescriptor, 
      digitMapDescriptor         DigitMapDescriptor, 
      observedEventsDescriptor   ObservedEventsDescriptor, 
      statisticsDescriptor       StatisticsDescriptor, 
      packagesDescriptor         PackagesDescriptor, 
      emptyDescriptors           AuditDescriptor, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   AuditDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      auditToken  BIT STRING 
            { 
               muxToken(0), modemToken(1), mediaToken(2), 
               eventsToken(3), signalsToken(4), 
               digitMapToken(5), statsToken(6), 
               observedEventsToken(7), 
               packagesToken(8), eventBufferToken(9) 
            } OPTIONAL, 
      ..., 
      auditPropertyToken SEQUENCE OF IndAuditParameter OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   IndAuditParameter ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      indaudmediaDescriptor         IndAudMediaDescriptor, 
      indaudeventsDescriptor        IndAudEventsDescriptor, 
      indaudeventBufferDescriptor   IndAudEventBufferDescriptor, 
      indaudsignalsDescriptor       IndAudSignalsDescriptor, 
      indauddigitMapDescriptor      IndAudDigitMapDescriptor, 
      indaudstatisticsDescriptor    IndAudStatisticsDescriptor, 
      indaudpackagesDescriptor      IndAudPackagesDescriptor, 
      ... 
   } 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 105] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
   IndAudMediaDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
       
      termStateDescr    IndAudTerminationStateDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      streams  CHOICE 
            { 
               oneStream      IndAudStreamParms, 
               multiStream    SEQUENCE OF IndAudStreamDescriptor 
            } OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudStreamDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      streamID                StreamID, 
      streamParms             IndAudStreamParms 
   } 
    
   IndAudStreamParms ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      localControlDescriptor  IndAudLocalControlDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      localDescriptor         IndAudLocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      remoteDescriptor        IndAudLocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudLocalControlDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      streamMode              NULL OPTIONAL, 
      reserveValue            NULL OPTIONAL, 
      reserveGroup            NULL OPTIONAL, 
      propertyParms           SEQUENCE OF IndAudPropertyParm OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudPropertyParm ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      name     PkgdName, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudLocalRemoteDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      propGroupID    INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL, 
      propGrps       IndAudPropertyGroup, 
      ... 
   } 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 106] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   IndAudPropertyGroup ::= SEQUENCE OF IndAudPropertyParm 
    
   IndAudTerminationStateDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE  
   { 
      propertyParms        SEQUENCE OF IndAudPropertyParm, 
      eventBufferControl   NULL OPTIONAL, 
      serviceState         NULL OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudEventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      requestID      RequestID OPTIONAL, 
      pkgdName       PkgdName, 
      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudEventBufferDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      eventName   PkgdName, 
      streamID    StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudSignalsDescriptor ::=CHOICE 
   { 
      signal         IndAudSignal, 
      seqSigList     IndAudSeqSigList, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudSeqSigList ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      id             INTEGER(0..65535), 
      signalList     IndAudSignal OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   IndAudSignal ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      signalName     PkgdName, 
      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   IndAudDigitMapDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      digitMapName   DigitMapNameOPTIONAL 
   } 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 107] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
   IndAudStatisticsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE  
   { 
      statName       PkgdName 
   } 
    
   IndAudPackagesDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      packageName       Name, 
      packageVersion    INTEGER(0..99), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   NotifyRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID              TerminationIDList, 
      observedEventsDescriptor   ObservedEventsDescriptor, 
      errorDescriptor            ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   NotifyReply ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID           TerminationIDList, 
      errorDescriptor         ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ObservedEventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      requestId               RequestID, 
      observedEventLst        SEQUENCE OF ObservedEvent 
   } 
    
   ObservedEvent ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      eventName               EventName, 
      streamID                StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      eventParList            SEQUENCE OF EventParameter, 
      timeNotation            TimeNotation OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   EventName ::= PkgdName 
    
   EventParameter ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      eventParameterName      Name, 
      value                   Value, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 108] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      -- For use of extraInfo see the comment related to PropertyParm 
      extraInfo CHOICE 
      { 
         relation Relation, 
         range    BOOLEAN, 
         sublist  BOOLEAN 
      } OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
    
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeRequest ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID           TerminationIDList, 
      serviceChangeParms      ServiceChangeParm, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeReply ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      terminationID           TerminationIDList, 
      serviceChangeResult     ServiceChangeResult, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   -- For ServiceChangeResult, no parameters are mandatory.  Hence the 
   -- distinction between ServiceChangeParm and ServiceChangeResParm. 
    
   ServiceChangeResult ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      errorDescriptor            ErrorDescriptor, 
      serviceChangeResParms      ServiceChangeResParm 
   } 
    
   WildcardField ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(1)) 
    
   TerminationID ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      wildcard       SEQUENCE OF WildcardField,  
      id             OCTET STRING(SIZE(1..8)), 
      ... 
   } 
   -- See A.1 for explanation of wildcarding mechanism. 
   -- Termination ID 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF indicates the ROOT Termination. 
    
   TerminationIDList ::= SEQUENCE OF TerminationID 
    




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 109] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   MediaDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      termStateDescr    TerminationStateDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      streams           CHOICE 
               { 
                  oneStream      StreamParms, 
                  multiStream    SEQUENCE OF StreamDescriptor 
               } OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   StreamDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      streamID                StreamID, 
      streamParms             StreamParms 
   } 
    
   StreamParms ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      localControlDescriptor     LocalControlDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      localDescriptor            LocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      remoteDescriptor           LocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   LocalControlDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      streamMode        StreamMode OPTIONAL, 
      reserveValue      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      reserveGroup      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      propertyParms     SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   StreamMode ::= ENUMERATED  
   { 
      sendOnly(0), 
      recvOnly(1), 
      sendRecv(2), 
      inactive(3), 
      loopBack(4), 
         ... 
   } 
    
   -- In PropertyParm, value is a SEQUENCE OF octet string.  When sent 
   -- by an MGC the interpretation is as follows: 
   -- empty sequence means CHOOSE 
   -- one element sequence specifies value 
   -- If the sublist field is not selected, a longer sequence means 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 110] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   -- "choose one of the values" (i.e. value1 OR value2 OR ...) 
   -- If the sublist field is selected, 
   -- a sequence with more than one element encodes the value of a 
   -- list-valued property (i.e. value1 AND value2 AND ...). 
   -- The relation field may only be selected if the value sequence 
   -- has length 1.  It indicates that the MG has to choose a value 
   -- for the property. E.g. x > 3 (using the greaterThan 
   -- value for relation) instructs the MG to choose any value larger 
   -- than 3 for property x. 
   -- The range field may only be selected if the value sequence 
   -- has length 2.  It indicates that the MG has to choose a value 
   -- in the range between the first octet in the value sequence and 
   -- the trailing octet in the value sequence, including the 
   -- boundary values. 
   -- When sent by the MG, only responses to an AuditCapability request 
   -- may contain multiple values, a range, or a relation field. 
    
   PropertyParm ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      name        PkgdName, 
      value       SEQUENCE OF OCTET STRING, 
      extraInfo   CHOICE 
      { 
         relation    Relation, 
         range       BOOLEAN, 
         sublist     BOOLEAN 
      } OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   Name ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(2)) 
    
   PkgdName ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4)) 
   -- represents Package Name (2 octets) plus Property, Event, 
   -- Signal Names or Statistics ID. (2 octets) 
   -- To wildcard a package use 0xFFFF for first two octets, choose 
   -- is not allowed. To reference native property tag specified in 
   -- Annex C, use 0x0000 as first two octets. 
   -- To wildcard a Property, Event, Signal, or Statistics ID, use 
   -- 0xFFFF for last two octets, choose is not allowed. 
   -- Wildcarding of Package Name is permitted only if Property, 
   -- Event, Signal, or Statistics ID are 
   -- also wildcarded. 
    
   Relation ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      greaterThan(0), 
      smallerThan(1), 
      unequalTo(2), 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 111] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      ... 
   } 
    
   LocalRemoteDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      propGrps SEQUENCE OF PropertyGroup, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   PropertyGroup ::= SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm 
    
   TerminationStateDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE  
   { 
      propertyParms        SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm, 
      eventBufferControl   EventBufferControl OPTIONAL, 
      serviceState         ServiceState OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   EventBufferControl ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      off(0), 
      lockStep(1), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ServiceState ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      test(0), 
      outOfSvc(1), 
      inSvc(2), 
         ... 
   } 
    
   MuxDescriptor   ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      muxType           MuxType, 
      termList          SEQUENCE OF TerminationID, 
      nonStandardData   NonStandardData OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   MuxType ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      h221(0), 
      h223(1), 
      h226(2), 
      v76(3), 
      ..., 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 112] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      nx64k(4) 
   } 
    
   StreamID ::= INTEGER(0..65535)   -- 16-bit unsigned integer 
    
   EventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      requestID      RequestID OPTIONAL, 
                  -- RequestID must be present if eventList 
                  -- is non empty 
      eventList      SEQUENCE OF RequestedEvent, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   RequestedEvent ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      pkgdName       PkgdName, 
      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      eventAction    RequestedActions OPTIONAL, 
      evParList      SEQUENCE OF EventParameter, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   RequestedActions ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      keepActive           BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      eventDM              EventDM OPTIONAL, 
      secondEvent          SecondEventsDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      signalsDescriptor    SignalsDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   EventDM ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      digitMapName   DigitMapName, 
      digitMapValue  DigitMapValue 
   } 
    
   SecondEventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      requestID         RequestID OPTIONAL, 
      eventList         SEQUENCE OF SecondRequestedEvent, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   SecondRequestedEvent ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      pkgdName          PkgdName, 
      streamID          StreamID OPTIONAL, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 113] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      eventAction       SecondRequestedActions OPTIONAL, 
      evParList         SEQUENCE OF EventParameter, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   SecondRequestedActions ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      keepActive           BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      eventDM              EventDM OPTIONAL, 
      signalsDescriptor    SignalsDescriptor OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   EventBufferDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF EventSpec 
    
   EventSpec ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      eventName      EventName, 
      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      eventParList   SEQUENCE OF EventParameter, 
      ... 
   } 
    
    
   SignalsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF SignalRequest 
    
   SignalRequest ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      signal         Signal, 
      seqSigList     SeqSigList, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   SeqSigList ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      id          INTEGER(0..65535), 
      signalList  SEQUENCE OF Signal 
   } 
    
   Signal ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      signalName        SignalName, 
      streamID          StreamID OPTIONAL, 
      sigType           SignalType OPTIONAL, 
      duration          INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, 
      notifyCompletion  NotifyCompletion OPTIONAL, 
      keepActive        BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, 
      sigParList        SEQUENCE OF SigParameter, 
      ... 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 114] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   } 
    
   SignalType ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      brief(0), 
      onOff(1), 
      timeOut(2), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   SignalName ::= PkgdName 
    
   NotifyCompletion ::= BIT STRING 
   { 
      onTimeOut(0), onInterruptByEvent(1), 
      onInterruptByNewSignalDescr(2), otherReason(3) 
   } 
    
   SigParameter ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      sigParameterName     Name, 
      value                Value, 
   -- For use of extraInfo see the comment related to PropertyParm 
      extraInfo CHOICE 
      { 
         relation Relation, 
         range    BOOLEAN, 
         sublist  BOOLEAN 
      } OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   -- For an AuditCapReply with all events, the RequestID SHALL be ALL. 
   -- ALL is represented by 0xffffffff. 
    
   RequestID ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295)   -- 32-bit unsigned integer 
    
   ModemDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      mtl               SEQUENCE OF ModemType,  
      mpl               SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm, 
      nonStandardData   NonStandardData OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   ModemType ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      v18(0), 
      v22(1), 
      v22bis(2), 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 115] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      v32(3), 
      v32bis(4), 
      v34(5), 
      v90(6), 
      v91(7), 
      synchISDN(8), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   DigitMapDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      digitMapName   DigitMapName OPTIONAL, 
      digitMapValue  DigitMapValue OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   DigitMapName ::= Name 
    
   DigitMapValue ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      startTimer        INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL, 
      shortTimer        INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL, 
      longTimer         INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL, 
      digitMapBody      IA5String, 
   -- Units are seconds for start, short and long timers, and 
   -- hundreds of milliseconds for duration timer. Thus start, 
   -- short, and long range from 1 to 99 seconds and duration 
   -- from 100 ms to 9.9 s 
      -- See A.3 for explanation of digit map syntax 
      ..., 
      durationTimer     INTEGER (0..99) OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeParm ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      serviceChangeMethod     ServiceChangeMethod, 
      serviceChangeAddress    ServiceChangeAddress OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeVersion    INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeProfile    ServiceChangeProfile OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeReason     Value, 
   -- A serviceChangeReason consists of a numeric reason code 
   -- and an optional text description. 
   -- The serviceChangeReason SHALL be a string consisting of  
   -- a decimal reason code, optionally followed by a single  
   -- space character and a textual description string. 
   -- This string is first BER-encoded as an IA5String. 
   -- The result of this BER-encoding is then encoded as 
   -- an ASN.1 OCTET STRING type, "double wrapping" the  
   -- value 
   -- as was done for package elements. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 116] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      serviceChangeDelay      INTEGER(0..4294967295) OPTIONAL, 
                                        -- 32-bit unsigned integer 
      serviceChangeMgcId      MId OPTIONAL, 
      timeStamp               TimeNotation OPTIONAL, 
      nonStandardData         NonStandardData OPTIONAL, 
      ..., 
      serviceChangeInfo       AuditDescriptor OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeAddress ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      portNumber        INTEGER(0..65535),    -- TCP/UDP port number 
      ip4Address        IP4Address, 
      ip6Address        IP6Address, 
      domainName        DomainName, 
      deviceName        PathName, 
      mtpAddress        OCTET STRING(SIZE(2..4)), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeResParm ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      serviceChangeMgcId      MId OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeAddress    ServiceChangeAddress OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeVersion    INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL, 
      serviceChangeProfile    ServiceChangeProfile OPTIONAL, 
      timestamp               TimeNotation OPTIONAL, 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeMethod ::= ENUMERATED 
   { 
      failover(0), 
      forced(1), 
      graceful(2), 
      restart(3), 
      disconnected(4), 
      handOff(5), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   ServiceChangeProfile ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      profileName    IA5String(SIZE (1..67)) 
    
      -- 64 characters for name, 1 for "/", 2 for version to match ABNF 
   } 
    
   PackagesDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF PackagesItem 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 117] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
   PackagesItem ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      packageName       Name, 
      packageVersion    INTEGER(0..99), 
      ... 
   } 
    
   StatisticsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF StatisticsParameter 
    
   StatisticsParameter ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      statName       PkgdName, 
      statValue      Value OPTIONAL 
   } 
    
   NonStandardData ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      nonStandardIdentifier   NonStandardIdentifier, 
      data                    OCTET STRING 
   } 
    
   NonStandardIdentifier ::= CHOICE 
   { 
      object            OBJECT IDENTIFIER, 
      h221NonStandard   H221NonStandard, 
      experimental      IA5String(SIZE(8)),  
          -- first two characters SHOULD be "X-" or "X+" 
      ... 
   } 
    
   H221NonStandard ::= SEQUENCE 
   {  t35CountryCode1      INTEGER(0..255), 
      t35CountryCode2      INTEGER(0..255),      -- country, as per T.35 
      t35Extension         INTEGER(0..255),      -- assigned nationally 
      manufacturerCode     INTEGER(0..65535), -- assigned nationally 
      ... 
   } 
    
   TimeNotation ::= SEQUENCE 
   { 
      date     IA5String(SIZE(8)),  -- yyyymmdd format 
      time     IA5String(SIZE(8))   -- hhmmssss format 
      -- per ISO 8601:1988 
   } 
    
   Value ::= SEQUENCE OF OCTET STRING 
    
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 118] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   END 
    

    

   A.3   Digit maps and path names 

   From a syntactic viewpoint, digit maps are strings with syntactic 
   restrictions imposed upon them. The syntax of valid digit maps is 
   specified in ABNF [RFC 2234].  The syntax for digit maps presented in 
   this subclause is for illustrative purposes only. The definition of 
   digitMap in Annex B takes precedence in the case of differences 
   between the two. 

   digitMap = (digitString 
                / LWSP "(" LWSP digitStringList LWSP ")" LWSP) 

   digitStringList = digitString *( LWSP "|" LWSP digitString ) 

   digitString     = 1*(digitStringElement) 

   digitStringElement = digitPosition [DOT] 

   digitPosition   = digitMapLetter / digitMapRange 

   digitMapRange   = ("x" / (LWSP "[" LWSP digitLetter LWSP "]" LWSP)) 

   digitLetter     = *((DIGIT "-" DIGIT) /digitMapLetter) 

   digitMapLetter = DIGIT           ;digits 0-9 
             / %x41-4B / %x61-6B    ;a-k and A-K 
             / "L"/ "S" /  "T"      ;Inter-event timers 
                                    ;(long, short, start) 
             / "Z"                  ;Long duration event 

   DOT = %x2E ; "." 
   LWSP = *(WSP / COMMENT / EOL) 
   WSP = SP / HTAB 
   COMMENT = ";" *(SafeChar / RestChar / WSP) EOL 
   EOL = (CR [LF]) / LF 
   SP = %x20 
   HTAB = %x09 
   CR = %x0D 
   LF = %x0A 

   SafeChar = DIGIT / ALPHA / "+" / "-" / "&" / "!" / "_" / "/" / 
         "'" / "?" / "@" / "^" / "`" / "~" / "*" / "$" / "\" / 
         "(" / ")" / "%" / "." 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 119] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   RestChar = ";" / "[" / "]" / "{" / "}" / ":" / "," / "#" / 
         "<" / ">" / "=" / %x22 

   DIGIT = %x30-39      ; digits 0 through 9 
   ALPHA = %x41-5A / %x61-7A  ; A-Z, a-z 

   A path name is also a string with syntactic restrictions imposed upon 
   it.  The ABNF production defining it is copied from Annex B. 

   ; Total length of pathNAME must not exceed 64 chars. 
   pathNAME = ["*"] NAME *("/" / "*"/ ALPHA / DIGIT /"_" / "$" )  
              ["@" pathDomainName ] 

   ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is meaningless  
   ; in a path domain name.  
   pathDomainName       = (ALPHA / DIGIT / "*" )  
                          *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" / "*" / ".") 

   NAME = ALPHA *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "_" ) 
































roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 120] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


NNEX B  TEXT ENCODING OF THE PROTOCOL 

.1   Coding of wildcards 

   In a text encoding of the protocol, while TerminationIDs are 
   arbitrary, by judicious choice of names, the wildcard character, "*" 
   may be made more useful. When the wildcard character is encountered, 
   it will "match" all TerminationIDs having the same previous and 
   following characters (if appropriate). For example, if there were 
   TerminationIDs of R13/3/1, R13/3/2 and R13/3/3, the TerminationID 
   R13/3/* would match all of them. There are some circumstances where 
   ALL Terminations must be referred to. The TerminationID "*" suffices, 
   and is referred to as ALL. The CHOOSE TerminationID "$" may be used 
   to signal to the MG that it has to create an ephemeral Termination or 
   select an idle physical Termination. 

.2   ABNF specification 

   The protocol syntax is presented in ABNF according to RFC 2234. 

   Note 1 - This syntax specification does not enforce all restrictions 
   on element inclusions and values.  Some additional restrictions are 
   stated in comments and other restrictions appear in the text of this 
   recommendation.  These additional restrictions are part of the 
   protocol even though not enforced by this specification. 

   Note 2 - The syntax is context-dependent. For example, "Add" can be 
   the AddToken or a NAME depending on the context in which it occurs. 

   Everything in the ABNF and text encoding is case insensitive. This 
   includes TerminationIDs, digitmap Ids etc. SDP is case sensitive as 
   per RFC 2327. 

   ; NOTE -- The ABNF in this section uses the VALUE construct (or lists  
   ; of VALUE constructs) to encode various package element values 
   ; (properties, signal parameters, etc.).  The types of these values 
   ; vary and are specified the relevant package definition.  Several 
   ; such types are described in section 12.2. 
   ; 
   ; The ABNF specification for VALUE allows a quotedString form or a 
   ; collection of SafeChars.  The encoding of package element values 
   ; into ABNF VALUES is specified below.  If a type's encoding allows 
   ; characters other than SafeChars, the quotedString form MUST be used 
   ; for all values of that type, even for specific values that consist 
   ; only of SafeChars. 
   ; 
   ; String:  A string MUST use the quotedString form of VALUE and can 
   ; contain anything allowable in the quotedString form. 
   ; 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 121] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ; Integer, Double, and Unsigned Integer:  Decimal values can be 
   ; encoded using characters 0-9.  Hexadecimal values must be prefixed 
   ; with '0x' and can use characters 0-9,a-f,A-F.  An octal format is 
   ; not supported. Negative integers start with '-' and MUST be 
   ; Decimal.  The SafeChar form of VALUE MUST be used. 
   ;  
   ; Character:  A UTF-8 encoding of a single letter surrounded by 
   ; double quotes. 
   ; 
   ; Enumeration:  An enumeration MUST use the SafeChar form of VALUE 
   ; and can contain anything allowable in the SafeChar form. 
   ; 
   ; Boolean:  Boolean values are encoded as "on" and "off" and are 
   ; case insensitive.  The SafeChar form of VALUE MUST be used. 
   ; 
   ; Future types:  Any defined types MUST fit within 
   ; the ABNF specification of VALUE.  Specifically, if a type's 
   ; encoding allows characters other than SafeChars, the quotedString 
   ; form MUST be used for all values of that type, even for specific 
   ; values that consist only of SafeChars.  
   ; 
   ; Note that there is no way to use the double quote character within 
   ; a value. 
   ; 
   ; Note that SDP disallows whitespace at the beginning of a line,  
   ; Megaco ABNF allows whitespace before the beginning of the SDP in  
   ; the Local/Remote descriptor.  Parsers SHOULD accept whitespace 
   ; between the LBRKT following the Local/Remote token and the 
   ; beginning of the SDP. 

   megacoMessage        = LWSP [authenticationHeader SEP ] message  
    
   authenticationHeader = AuthToken EQUAL SecurityParmIndex COLON  
                          SequenceNum COLON AuthData  
                           
   SecurityParmIndex    = "0x" 8(HEXDIG) 
   SequenceNum          = "0x" 8(HEXDIG) 
   AuthData             = "0x" 24*64(HEXDIG) 
    
   message = MegacopToken SLASH Version SEP mId SEP messageBody 
   ; The version of the protocol defined here is equal to 2. 
                         
   messageBody          = ( errorDescriptor / transactionList ) 
    
   transactionList      = 1*( transactionRequest / transactionReply /  
                          transactionPending / transactionResponseAck ) 
   ; Use of response acks is dependent on underlying transport 
    



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 122] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   transactionPending = PendingToken EQUAL TransactionID  
                           LBRKT  RBRKT 
    
   transactionResponseAck = ResponseAckToken LBRKT transactionAck 
                  *(COMMA transactionAck) RBRKT 
   transactionAck = TransactionID / (TransactionID "-" TransactionID) 
    
   transactionRequest   = TransToken EQUAL TransactionID LBRKT 
                          actionRequest *(COMMA actionRequest) RBRKT 
    
   actionRequest        = CtxToken EQUAL ContextID LBRKT (( 
                          contextRequest [COMMA  commandRequestList])  
                          / commandRequestList) RBRKT 
    
   contextRequest    = ((contextProperties [COMMA contextAudit]) 
               / contextAudit) 
    
   contextProperties    = contextProperty *(COMMA contextProperty) 
    
   ; at-most-once 
   contextProperty  = (topologyDescriptor / priority / EmergencyToken) 
    
   contextAudit     = ContextAuditToken LBRKT  
       contextAuditProperties *(COMMA contextAuditProperties) RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once 
   contextAuditProperties = ( TopologyToken / EmergencyToken /  
                              PriorityToken ) 
    
   ; "O-" indicates an optional command 
   ; "W-" indicates a wildcarded response to a command  
   commandRequestList= ["O-"] ["W-"] commandRequest * 
                        (COMMA ["O-"] ["W-"]commandRequest) 
    
   commandRequest      = ( ammRequest / subtractRequest / auditRequest /  
                          notifyRequest / serviceChangeRequest)    
    
   transactionReply = ReplyToken EQUAL TransactionID LBRKT  
                      [ ImmAckRequiredToken COMMA] 
                      ( errorDescriptor / actionReplyList ) RBRKT  
                           
   actionReplyList      = actionReply *(COMMA actionReply )  
    
   actionReply          = CtxToken EQUAL ContextID LBRKT  
                          ( errorDescriptor / commandReply ) / 
                         (commandReply COMMA errorDescriptor) ) RBRKT 
    
   commandReply      = (( contextProperties [COMMA commandReplyList] ) /  
                           commandReplyList ) 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 123] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
    
   commandReplyList     = commandReplys *(COMMA commandReplys ) 
    
   commandReplys        = (serviceChangeReply / auditReply / ammsReply /  
                           notifyReply ) 
    
   ;Add Move and Modify have the same request parameters 
   ammRequest           = (AddToken / MoveToken / ModifyToken ) EQUAL  
                          TerminationID [LBRKT ammParameter *(COMMA  
                          ammParameter) RBRKT] 
    
   ;at-most-once 
   ammParameter         = (mediaDescriptor / modemDescriptor /  
                           muxDescriptor / eventsDescriptor /  
                           signalsDescriptor / digitMapDescriptor / 
                           eventBufferDescriptor / auditDescriptor) 
    
   ammsReply            = (AddToken / MoveToken / ModifyToken /  
                           SubtractToken ) EQUAL TerminationID [ LBRKT  
                           terminationAudit RBRKT ]                           
    
   subtractRequest      =  SubtractToken EQUAL TerminationID  
                           [ LBRKT auditDescriptor RBRKT] 
    
   auditRequest         =  (AuditValueToken / AuditCapToken ) EQUAL 
                           TerminationID LBRKT auditDescriptor RBRKT 
    
   auditReply           = (AuditValueToken / AuditCapToken )  
                          ( contextTerminationAudit  / auditOther)    
    
   auditOther = EQUAL TerminationID [LBRKT terminationAudit RBRKT]   
    
   terminationAudit = auditReturnParameter *(COMMA auditReturnParameter)  
    
   contextTerminationAudit = EQUAL CtxToken ( terminationIDList /  
                          LBRKT errorDescriptor RBRKT ) 
    
   auditReturnParameter = (mediaDescriptor / modemDescriptor /   
      muxDescriptor / eventsDescriptor / signalsDescriptor / 
      digitMapDescriptor / observedEventsDescriptor / 
      eventBufferDescriptor / statisticsDescriptor / 
      packagesDescriptor / errorDescriptor / auditItem) 
    
   auditDescriptor = AuditToken LBRKT [ auditItem *(COMMA auditItem) ]  
                                RBRKT 
    
   notifyRequest        = NotifyToken EQUAL TerminationID  
                          LBRKT ( observedEventsDescriptor  


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 124] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                                [ COMMA errorDescriptor ] ) RBRKT 
    
   notifyReply          = NotifyToken EQUAL TerminationID  
                          [ LBRKT errorDescriptor RBRKT ] 
    
   serviceChangeRequest = ServiceChangeToken EQUAL TerminationID 
                          LBRKT serviceChangeDescriptor RBRKT  
    
   serviceChangeReply   = ServiceChangeToken EQUAL TerminationID 
                          [LBRKT (errorDescriptor /  
                          serviceChangeReplyDescriptor) RBRKT]                        
    
   errorDescriptor   = ErrorToken EQUAL ErrorCode 
                       LBRKT [quotedString] RBRKT   
    
   ErrorCode            = 1*4(DIGIT) ; could be extended   
    
    
   TransactionID        = UINT32   
    
   ;The values 0x0, 0xFFFFFFFE and 0xFFFFFFFF are reserved. 
   ContextID            = (UINT32 / "*" / "-" / "$") 
    
   TerminationID        = "ROOT" / pathNAME / "$" / "*" 
    
   terminationIDList  = LBRKT TerminationID *(COMMA TerminationID) RBRKT 
    
    
   mId                  = (( domainAddress / domainName )  
                          [":" portNumber]) / mtpAddress / deviceName   
    
   ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is meaningless  
   ; in a domain name.   
   domainName           = "<" (ALPHA / DIGIT) *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" /  
                          ".") ">" 
    
   deviceName           = pathNAME 
    
   domainAddress        = "[" (IPv4address / IPv6address) "]" 
    
   ;RFC2373 contains the definition of IP6Addresses. 
   IPv6address          = hexpart [ ":" IPv4address ] 
    
   IPv4address          = V4hex DOT V4hex DOT V4hex DOT V4hex 
   V4hex                = 1*3(DIGIT) ; "0".."255" 
    
   ; this production, while occurring in RFC2373, is not referenced 
   ; IPv6prefix           = hexpart SLASH 1*2DIGIT 
   hexpart = hexseq "::" [ hexseq ] / "::" [ hexseq ] / hexseq 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 125] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   hexseq               = hex4 *( ":" hex4) 
   hex4                 = 1*4HEXDIG 
    
   portNumber           = UINT16 
    
   ; Addressing structure of mtpAddress: 
   ;     25 - 15               0 
   ;    |  PC             | NI | 
   ;     24 - 14 bits     2 bits 
   ; Note: 14 bits are defined for international use. 
   ; Two national options exist where the point code is 16 or 24 bits. 
   ; To octet align the mtpAddress the MSBs shall be encoded as 0s.  
   ; An octet shall be represented by 2 hex digits. 
   mtpAddress           = MTPToken LBRKT 4*8 (HEXDIG) RBRKT 
    
   ; Total length of pathNAME must not exceed 64 chars. 
   pathNAME  = ["*"] NAME *("/" / "*"/ ALPHA / DIGIT /"_" / "$" )  
               ["@" pathDomainName ] 
    
   ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is meaningless  
   ; in a path domain name.  
   pathDomainName       = (ALPHA / DIGIT / "*" )  
                          *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" / "*" / ".") 
                           
    
   mediaDescriptor = MediaToken LBRKT mediaParm *(COMMA mediaParm) RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most one terminationStateDescriptor 
   ; and either streamParm(s) or streamDescriptor(s) but not both 
   mediaParm = (streamParm / streamDescriptor /  
                 terminationStateDescriptor) 
    
   ; at-most-once per item 
   streamParm           = ( localDescriptor / remoteDescriptor /  
                           localControlDescriptor ) 
    
   streamDescriptor     = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID LBRKT streamParm  
                          *(COMMA streamParm) RBRKT 
    
   localControlDescriptor = LocalControlToken LBRKT localParm  
                            *(COMMA localParm) RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once per item except for propertyParm 
   localParm = ( streamMode / propertyParm / reservedValueMode 
                / reservedGroupMode ) 
    
   reservedValueMode    = ReservedValueToken EQUAL ( "ON" / "OFF" ) 
   reservedGroupMode    = ReservedGroupToken EQUAL ( "ON" / "OFF" ) 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 126] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   streamMode           = ModeToken EQUAL streamModes 
    
   streamModes  = (SendonlyToken / RecvonlyToken / SendrecvToken /  
                          InactiveToken / LoopbackToken ) 
    
   propertyParm         = pkgdName parmValue 
   parmValue            = (EQUAL alternativeValue/ INEQUAL VALUE) 
   alternativeValue     = ( VALUE  
               / LSBRKT VALUE *(COMMA VALUE) RSBRKT  
                   ; sublist (i.e. A AND B AND ...) 
               / LBRKT VALUE *(COMMA VALUE) RBRKT 
                   ; alternatives (i.e. A OR B OR ...) 
               /  LSBRKT VALUE COLON VALUE RSBRKT ) 
                   ; range                  
    
   INEQUAL              = LWSP (">" / "<" / "#" ) LWSP 
   LSBRKT               = LWSP "[" LWSP 
   RSBRKT               = LWSP "]" LWSP 
    
   ; Note û The octet zero is not among the permitted characters in 
   ; octet string. As the current definition is limited to SDP, and a 
   ; zero octet would not be a legal character in SDP, this is not a 
   ; concern. 
   localDescriptor      = LocalToken LBRKT octetString RBRKT 
    
   remoteDescriptor     = RemoteToken LBRKT octetString RBRKT 
    
   eventBufferDescriptor= EventBufferToken [ LBRKT eventSpec 
                          *( COMMA eventSpec) RBRKT ] 
    
   eventSpec      = pkgdName [ LBRKT eventSpecParameter 
                *(COMMA eventSpecParameter) RBRKT ] 
    
   eventSpecParameter   = (eventStream / eventOther) 
    
   eventBufferControl     = BufferToken EQUAL ( "OFF" / LockStepToken ) 
    
   terminationStateDescriptor = TerminationStateToken LBRKT  
              terminationStateParm *( COMMA terminationStateParm ) RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once per item except for propertyParm 
   terminationStateParm =(propertyParm / serviceStates / 
                           eventBufferControl ) 
    
   serviceStates        = ServiceStatesToken EQUAL ( TestToken / 
                          OutOfSvcToken / InSvcToken ) 
    
   muxDescriptor        = MuxToken EQUAL MuxType  terminationIDList 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 127] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   MuxType              = ( H221Token / H223Token / H226Token / V76Token 
                           / extensionParameter / Nx64kToken ) 
    
   StreamID             = UINT16 
    
   pkgdName = (PackageName SLASH ItemID) ;specific item 
               / (PackageName SLASH "*") ;all items in package 
               / ("*" SLASH "*")         ; all items supported by the MG 
   PackageName          = NAME 
   ItemID               = NAME 
    
   eventsDescriptor     = EventsToken [ EQUAL RequestID LBRKT  
                        requestedEvent *( COMMA requestedEvent ) RBRKT ] 
    
   requestedEvent       = pkgdName [ LBRKT eventParameter 
                          *( COMMA eventParameter ) RBRKT ] 
    
   ; at-most-once each of KeepActiveToken , eventDM and eventStream 
   ;at most one of either embedWithSig or embedNoSig but not both 
   ;KeepActiveToken and embedWithSig must not both be present 
   eventParameter = ( embedWithSig / embedNoSig / KeepActiveToken  
      /eventDM / eventStream / eventOther ) 
    
   embedWithSig = EmbedToken LBRKT signalsDescriptor 
                   [COMMA embedFirst ] RBRKT 
    
   embedNoSig   = EmbedToken LBRKT embedFirst RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once of each 
   embedFirst  = EventsToken [ EQUAL RequestID LBRKT 
             secondRequestedEvent *(COMMA secondRequestedEvent) RBRKT ] 
    
   secondRequestedEvent = pkgdName [ LBRKT secondEventParameter 
                          *( COMMA secondEventParameter ) RBRKT ] 
    
   ; at-most-once each of embedSig , KeepActiveToken, eventDM or 
   ; eventStream 
   ; KeepActiveToken and embedSig must not both be present 
   secondEventParameter = ( embedSig / KeepActiveToken / eventDM /  
                            eventStream / eventOther ) 
    
   embedSig  = EmbedToken LBRKT signalsDescriptor RBRKT 
    
   eventStream          = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID 
    
   eventOther           = eventParameterName parmValue 
    
   eventParameterName   = NAME 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 128] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   eventDM              = DigitMapToken EQUAL(( digitMapName ) /  
                          (LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ))  
    
   signalsDescriptor    = SignalsToken LBRKT [ signalParm  
                          *(COMMA signalParm)] RBRKT 
    
   signalParm           = signalList / signalRequest   
    
   signalRequest        = signalName [ LBRKT sigParameter                          
                         *(COMMA sigParameter) RBRKT ]  
    
   signalList           = SignalListToken EQUAL signalListId LBRKT                    
                      signalListParm *(COMMA signalListParm) RBRKT 
                           
   signalListId         = UINT16 
    
   ;exactly once signalType, at most once duration and every signal 
   ;parameter  
   signalListParm       = signalRequest 
    
   signalName           = pkgdName 
    
   ;at-most-once sigStream, at-most-once sigSignalType, 
   ;at-most-once sigDuration, every signalParameterName at most once 
   sigParameter = sigStream / sigSignalType / sigDuration / sigOther 
               / notifyCompletion / KeepActiveToken 
    
   sigStream            = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID 
    
   sigOther             = sigParameterName parmValue 
    
   sigParameterName     = NAME 
    
   sigSignalType        = SignalTypeToken EQUAL signalType 
    
   signalType           = (OnOffToken / TimeOutToken / BriefToken) 
    
   sigDuration          = DurationToken EQUAL UINT16 
    
   notifyCompletion     = NotifyCompletionToken EQUAL (LBRKT 
            notificationReason *(COMMA notificationReason) RBRKT) 
    
   notificationReason   = ( TimeOutToken / InterruptByEventToken 
               / InterruptByNewSignalsDescrToken 
               / OtherReasonToken ) 
    
   observedEventsDescriptor = ObservedEventsToken EQUAL RequestID 
                      LBRKT observedEvent *(COMMA observedEvent) RBRKT 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 129] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ;time per event, because it might be buffered 
   observedEvent        = [ TimeStamp LWSP COLON] LWSP  
                          pkgdName [ LBRKT observedEventParameter 
                          *(COMMA observedEventParameter) RBRKT ] 
    
   ;at-most-once eventStream, every eventParameterName at most once 
   observedEventParameter = eventStream / eventOther   
    
   ; For an AuditCapReply with all events, the RequestID SHOULD be ALL. 
   RequestID            = ( UINT32 / "*" ) 
    
   modemDescriptor      = ModemToken (( EQUAL modemType) /  
                          (LSBRKT modemType *(COMMA modemType) RSBRKT)) 
                          [ LBRKT propertyParm 
                         *(COMMA propertyParm) RBRKT ]  
    
   ; at-most-once except for extensionParameter 
   modemType            = (V32bisToken / V22bisToken / V18Token /  
                           V22Token / V32Token / V34Token / V90Token /  
                         V91Token / SynchISDNToken / extensionParameter) 
    
   digitMapDescriptor  = DigitMapToken EQUAL  
                ( ( LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ) 
                / (digitMapName [ LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ]) ) 
    
   digitMapName    = NAME 
    
   digitMapValue   = ["T" COLON Timer COMMA] ["S" COLON Timer COMMA] 
                     ["L" COLON Timer COMMA] ["Z" COLON Timer COMMA] 
                     digitMap  
    
   Timer                = 1*2DIGIT 
   ; Units are seconds for T, S, and L timers, and hundreds of  
   ; milliseconds for Z timer. Thus T, S, and L range from 1 to 99 
   ; seconds and Z from 100 ms to 9.9 s 
    
   digitMap = (digitString  
              / LWSP "(" LWSP digitStringList LWSP ")"  LWSP) 
    
   digitStringList      = digitString *( LWSP "|" LWSP digitString ) 
    
   digitString          = 1*(digitStringElement) 
    
   digitStringElement   = digitPosition [DOT] 
    
   digitPosition        = digitMapLetter / digitMapRange 
   digitMapRange  = ("x" / (LWSP "[" LWSP digitLetter LWSP "]" LWSP)) 
    
   digitLetter          = *((DIGIT "-" DIGIT ) / digitMapLetter) 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 130] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
   digitMapLetter       = DIGIT    ;Basic event symbols 
               / %x41-4B / %x61-6B ; a-k, A-K 
               / "L" / "S" / "T"   ;Inter-event timers  
                                   ; (long, short, start) 
               / "Z"               ;Long duration modifier 
    
   ; at-most-once, and DigitMapToken and PackagesToken are not allowed 
   ; in AuditCapabilities command 
   auditItem   = ( MuxToken / ModemToken / MediaToken /  
                   SignalsToken / EventBufferToken / 
                   DigitMapToken / StatsToken / EventsToken / 
                   ObservedEventsToken / PackagesToken ) / 
                   indAudterminationAudit) 
    
   indAudterminationAudit   = indAudauditReturnParameter  
                           *(COMMA indAudauditReturnParameter)  
    
   indAudauditReturnParameter = (indAudmediaDescriptor / /   
                  indAudeventsDescriptor /  
                  indAudsignalsDescriptor /  
                  indAuddigitMapDescriptor /  
                  indAudeventBufferDescriptor / 
                  indAudstatisticsDescriptor /  
                  indAudpackagesDescriptor) 
    
    
   indAudmediaDescriptor   = MediaToken LBRKT indAudmediaParm RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once per item 
   ; and either streamParm or streamDescriptor but not both 
   indAudmediaParm = (indAudstreamParm / indAudstreamDescriptor /  
                      indAudterminationStateDescriptor) 
    
   ; at-most-once 
   indAudstreamParm  = ( indAudlocalControlDescriptor ) 
   ; SDP too complex to pull out individual pieces for audit, 
   ; hence no individual audit for Local and Remote  
    
   indAudstreamDescriptor = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID  
                     LBRKT indAudstreamParm RBRKT 
    
   indAudlocalControlDescriptor = LocalControlToken  
                     LBRKT indAudlocalParm RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once per item 
   indAudlocalParm   = ( ModeToken / pkgdName / 
                   ReservedValueToken / 
                   ReservedGroupToken ) 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 131] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
    
   indAudterminationStateDescriptor = TerminationStateToken  
                     LBRKT indAudterminationStateParm RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once per item 
   indAudterminationStateParm =(pkgdName / ServiceStatesToken /  
                                 BufferToken) 
    
   indAudeventBufferDescriptor= EventBufferToken  
                     LBRKT indAudeventSpec RBRKT  
    
   indAudeventSpec   = pkgdName [ LBRKT indAudeventSpecParameter RBRKT ] 
    
   indAudeventSpecParameter   = (eventStream / eventParameterName) 
    
   indAudeventsDescriptor     = EventsToken EQUAL RequestID  
                     LBRKT indAudrequestedEvent RBRKT 
    
   indAudrequestedEvent       = pkgdName 
    
   indAudsignalsDescriptor    = SignalsToken  
                     LBRKT [ indAudsignalParm ] RBRKT 
    
   indAudsignalParm           = indAudsignalList / indAudsignalRequest  
   indAudsignalRequest        = signalName 
    
   indAudsignalList           = SignalListToken EQUAL signalListId  
                     LBRKTindAudsignalListParm RBRKT 
    
   indAudsignalListParm = indAudsignalRequest 
    
   indAuddigitMapDescriptor   = DigitMapToken EQUAL (digitMapName ) 
    
   indAudstatisticsDescriptor = StatsToken LBRKT pkgdName RBRKT 
    
   indAudpackagesDescriptor   = PackagesToken LBRKT packagesItem RBRKT 
    
    
   serviceChangeDescriptor = ServicesToken LBRKT serviceChangeParm  
                            *(COMMA serviceChangeParm) RBRKT 
    
   ; each parameter at-most-once 
   ; at most one of either serviceChangeAddress or serviceChangeMgcId  
   ; but not both 
   ; serviceChangeMethod and serviceChangeReason are REQUIRED 
   serviceChangeParm    = (serviceChangeMethod / serviceChangeReason / 
                          serviceChangeDelay / serviceChangeAddress /   
                          serviceChangeProfile / extension / TimeStamp / 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 132] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                          serviceChangeMgcId / serviceChangeVersion /  
                          auditItem) 
                         
   serviceChangeReplyDescriptor = ServicesToken LBRKT 
                 servChgReplyParm *(COMMA servChgReplyParm) RBRKT 
    
   ; at-most-once. Version is REQUIRED on first ServiceChange response 
   ; at most one of either serviceChangeAddress or serviceChangeMgcId  
   ; but not both 
   servChgReplyParm     = (serviceChangeAddress / serviceChangeMgcId / 
                          serviceChangeProfile / serviceChangeVersion /  
                          TimeStamp) 
    
   serviceChangeMethod  = MethodToken EQUAL (FailoverToken /  
                          ForcedToken / GracefulToken / RestartToken /  
                          DisconnectedToken / HandOffToken /  
                          extensionParameter) 
    
   ; A serviceChangeReason consists of a numeric reason code 
   ; and an optional text description. 
   ; A serviceChangeReason MUST be encoded using the quotedString  
   ; form of VALUE. 
   ; The quotedString SHALL contain a decimal reason code, 
   ; optionally followed by a single space character and a  
   ; textual description string.                       
   serviceChangeReason  = ReasonToken  EQUAL VALUE 
    
   serviceChangeDelay   = DelayToken   EQUAL UINT32 
    
   serviceChangeAddress = ServiceChangeAddressToken EQUAL ( mId / 
                          portNumber ) 
    
   serviceChangeMgcId   = MgcIdToken   EQUAL mId 
    
   serviceChangeProfile = ProfileToken EQUAL NAME SLASH Version 
    
   serviceChangeVersion = VersionToken EQUAL Version 
    
   extension            = extensionParameter parmValue 
    
   packagesDescriptor   = PackagesToken LBRKT packagesItem   
                          *(COMMA packagesItem) RBRKT 
    
   Version              = 1*2(DIGIT) 
    
   packagesItem         = NAME "-" UINT16 
    
   TimeStamp            = Date "T" Time ; per ISO 8601:1988  
   ; Date = yyyymmdd 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 133] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Date                 = 8(DIGIT) 
   ; Time = hhmmssss 
   Time                 = 8(DIGIT) 
    
   statisticsDescriptor = StatsToken LBRKT statisticsParameter 
                         *(COMMA statisticsParameter ) RBRKT 
    
   ;at-most-once per item  
   statisticsParameter  = pkgdName [EQUAL VALUE]  
    
   topologyDescriptor   = TopologyToken LBRKT topologyTriple 
                          *(COMMA topologyTriple) RBRKT 
    
   topologyTriple       = terminationA COMMA  
                          terminationB COMMA topologyDirection 
                          [COMMA eventStream ] 
   terminationA         = TerminationID 
   terminationB         = TerminationID 
    
   topologyDirection    = BothwayToken / IsolateToken / OnewayToken 
    
   priority             = PriorityToken EQUAL UINT16 
    
   extensionParameter   = "X"  ("-" / "+") 1*6(ALPHA / DIGIT) 
    
   ; octetString is used to describe SDP defined in RFC2327. 
   ; Caution SHOULD be taken if CRLF in RFC2327 is used. 
   ; To be safe, use EOL in this ABNF. 
   ; Whenever "}" appears in SDP, it is escaped by "\", e.g. "\}" 
   octetString          = *(nonEscapeChar) 
   nonEscapeChar        = ( "\}" / %x01-7C / %x7E-FF ) 
    
   ; Note û The double-quote character is not allowed in quotedString. 
   quotedString         = DQUOTE *(SafeChar / RestChar/ WSP) DQUOTE 
    
   UINT16               = 1*5(DIGIT)  ; %x0-FFFF  
   UINT32               = 1*10(DIGIT) ; %x0-FFFFFFFF  
    
   NAME                 = ALPHA *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "_" ) 
   VALUE                = quotedString / 1*(SafeChar) 
    
   SafeChar             = DIGIT / ALPHA / "+" / "-" / "&" /  
                          "!" / "_" / "/" / "'" / "?" / "@" /  
                          "^" / "`" / "~" / "*" / "$" / "\" /  
                          "(" / ")" / "%" / "|" / "." 
    
   EQUAL               = LWSP %x3D LWSP ; "=" 
   COLON               = %x3A           ; ":" 
   LBRKT               = LWSP %x7B LWSP ; "{" 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 134] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   RBRKT               = LWSP %x7D LWSP ; "}" 
   COMMA               = LWSP %x2C LWSP ; "," 
   DOT                 = %x2E           ; "." 
   SLASH               = %x2F           ; "/" 
   ALPHA               = %x41-5A / %x61-7A ; A-Z / a-z 
   DIGIT               = %x30-39         ; 0-9 
   DQUOTE              = %x22            ; " (Double Quote) 
   HEXDIG              = ( DIGIT / "A" / "B" / "C" / "D" / "E" / "F" ) 
   SP                  = %x20        ; space 
   HTAB                = %x09        ; horizontal tab 
   CR                  = %x0D        ; Carriage return 
   LF                  = %x0A        ; linefeed 
   LWSP                = *( WSP / COMMENT / EOL ) 
   EOL                 = (CR [LF] / LF ) 
   WSP                 = SP / HTAB ; white space 
   SEP                 = ( WSP / EOL / COMMENT) LWSP 
   COMMENT             = ";" *(SafeChar/ RestChar / WSP / %x22) EOL 
   RestChar            = ";" / "[" / "]" / "{" / "}" / ":" / "," / "#" /  
                          "<" / ">" / "="  
    
   ; New Tokens added to sigParameter must take the format of SPA* 
   ; * may be of any form i.e. SPAM 
   ; New Tokens added to eventParameter must take the form of EPA* 
   ; * may be of any form i.e. EPAD 
    
   AddToken                   = ("Add"                   / "A") 
   AuditToken                 = ("Audit"                 / "AT") 
   AuditCapToken              = ("AuditCapability"       / "AC") 
   AuditValueToken            = ("AuditValue"            / "AV") 
   AuthToken                  = ("Authentication"        / "AU") 
   BothwayToken               = ("Bothway"               / "BW") 
   BriefToken                 = ("Brief"                 / "BR") 
   BufferToken                = ("Buffer"                / "BF") 
   CtxToken                   = ("Context"               / "C") 
   ContextAuditToken          = ("ContextAudit"          / "CA") 
   DigitMapToken              = ("DigitMap"              / "DM") 
   DisconnectedToken          = ("Disconnected"          / "DC") 
   DelayToken                 = ("Delay"                 / "DL") 
   DurationToken              = ("Duration"              / "DR") 
   EmbedToken                 = ("Embed"                 / "EM") 
   EmergencyToken             = ("Emergency"             / "EG") 
   ErrorToken                 = ("Error"                 / "ER") 
   EventBufferToken           = ("EventBuffer"           / "EB") 
   EventsToken                = ("Events"                / "E") 
   FailoverToken              = ("Failover"              / "FL") 
   ForcedToken                = ("Forced"                / "FO") 
   GracefulToken              = ("Graceful"              / "GR") 
   H221Token                  = ("H221" ) 
   H223Token                  = ("H223" ) 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 135] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   H226Token                  = ("H226" ) 
   HandOffToken               = ("HandOff"               / "HO") 
   ImmAckRequiredToken        = ("ImmAckRequired"        / "IA") 
   InactiveToken              = ("Inactive"              / "IN") 
   IsolateToken               = ("Isolate"               / "IS") 
   InSvcToken                 = ("InService"             / "IV") 
   InterruptByEventToken      = ("IntByEvent"            / "IBE") 
   InterruptByNewSignalsDescrToken 
                              = ("IntBySigDescr"         / "IBS") 
   KeepActiveToken            = ("KeepActive"            / "KA") 
   LocalToken                 = ("Local"                 / "L") 
   LocalControlToken          = ("LocalControl"          / "O") 
   LockStepToken              = ("LockStep"              / "SP") 
   LoopbackToken              = ("Loopback"              / "LB") 
   MediaToken                 = ("Media"                 / "M") 
   MegacopToken               = ("MEGACO"                / "!") 
   MethodToken                = ("Method"                / "MT") 
   MgcIdToken                 = ("MgcIdToTry"            / "MG") 
   ModeToken                  = ("Mode"                  / "MO") 
   ModifyToken                = ("Modify"                / "MF") 
   ModemToken                 = ("Modem"                 / "MD") 
   MoveToken                  = ("Move"                  / "MV") 
   MTPToken                   = ("MTP") 
   MuxToken                   = ("Mux"                   / "MX") 
   NotifyToken                = ("Notify"                / "N") 
   NotifyCompletionToken      = ("NotifyCompletion"      / "NC") 
   Nx64kToken                 = ("Nx64Kservice"          / "N64") 
   ObservedEventsToken        = ("ObservedEvents"        / "OE") 
   OnewayToken                = ("Oneway"                / "OW") 
   OnOffToken                 = ("OnOff"                 / "OO") 
   OtherReasonToken           = ("OtherReason"           / "OR") 
   OutOfSvcToken              = ("OutOfService"          / "OS") 
   PackagesToken              = ("Packages"              / "PG") 
   PendingToken               = ("Pending"               / "PN") 
   PriorityToken              = ("Priority"              / "PR") 
   ProfileToken               = ("Profile"               / "PF") 
   ReasonToken                = ("Reason"                / "RE") 
   RecvonlyToken              = ("ReceiveOnly"           / "RC") 
   ReplyToken                 = ("Reply"                 / "P") 
   RestartToken               = ("Restart"               / "RS") 
   RemoteToken                = ("Remote"                / "R") 
   ReservedGroupToken         = ("ReservedGroup"         / "RG") 
   ReservedValueToken         = ("ReservedValue"         / "RV") 
   SendonlyToken              = ("SendOnly"              / "SO") 
   SendrecvToken              = ("SendReceive"           / "SR") 
   ServicesToken              = ("Services"              / "SV") 
   ServiceStatesToken         = ("ServiceStates"         / "SI") 
   ServiceChangeToken         = ("ServiceChange"         / "SC") 
   ServiceChangeAddressToken  = ("ServiceChangeAddress"  / "AD") 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 136] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   SignalListToken            = ("SignalList"            / "SL") 
   SignalsToken               = ("Signals"               / "SG") 
   SignalTypeToken            = ("SignalType"            / "SY") 
   StatsToken                 = ("Statistics"            / "SA") 
   StreamToken                = ("Stream"                / "ST") 
   SubtractToken              = ("Subtract"              / "S") 
   SynchISDNToken             = ("SynchISDN"             / "SN") 
   TerminationStateToken      = ("TerminationState"      / "TS") 
   TestToken                  = ("Test"                  / "TE") 
   TimeOutToken               = ("TimeOut"               / "TO") 
   TopologyToken              = ("Topology"              / "TP") 
   TransToken                 = ("Transaction"           / "T") 
   ResponseAckToken           = ("TransactionResponseAck" / "K") 
   V18Token                   = ("V18") 
   V22Token                   = ("V22") 
   V22bisToken                = ("V22b") 
   V32Token                   = ("V32") 
   V32bisToken                = ("V32b") 
   V34Token                   = ("V34") 
   V76Token                   = ("V76") 
   V90Token                   = ("V90") 
   V91Token                   = ("V91") 
   VersionToken               = ("Version"               /   "V") 
    

   B.3   Hexadecimal octet coding 

   Hexadecimal octet coding is a means for representing a string of 
   octets as a string of hexadecimal digits, with two digits 
   representing each octet. This octet encoding SHOULD be used when 
   encoding octet strings in the text version of the protocol. 

   For each octet, the 8-bit sequence is encoded as two hexadecimal 
   digits. Bit 0 is the first transmitted; bit 7 is the last. 

   Bits 7-4 are encoded as the first hexadecimal digit, with Bit 7 as 
   MSB and Bit 4 as LSB. Bits 3-0 are encoded as the second hexadecimal 
   digit, with Bit 3 as MSB and Bit 0 as LSB. 

   Examples: 

            Octet bit pattern             Hexadecimal 
                                          coding 

            00011011                      D8 

            11100100                      27 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 137] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            10000011 10100010 11001000    C1451390 
            00001001 

    

.4   Hexadecimal octet sequence 

   A hexadecimal octet sequence is an even number of hexadecimal digits, 
   terminated by a <CR> character. 










































roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 138] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


NNEX C  TAGS FOR MEDIA STREAM PROPERTIES 

   Parameters for Local, Remote and LocalControl descriptors are 
   specified as tag-value pairs if binary encoding is used for the 
   protocol. This annex contains the property names (PropertyID), the 
   tags (Property tag), type of the property (Type) and the values 
   (Value). Values presented in the Value field when the field contains 
   references shall be regarded as "information". The reference contains 
   the normative values. If a value field does not contain a reference, 
   then the values in that field can be considered as "normative". 

   Tags are given as hexadecimal numbers in this annex. When setting the 
   value of a property, a MGC may underspecify the value according to 
   one of the mechanisms specified in 7.1.1. 

   It is optional to support the properties in this Annex or any of its 
   sub-sections. For example, only three properties from C.3 and only 
   five properties from C.8 might be implemented. 

   For type "enumeration" the value is represented by the value in 
   brackets, e.g. Send(0), Receive(1). Annex C properties with the types 
   "N bits" or "M Octets" SHOULD be treated as octet strings when 
   encoding the protocol. Properties with "N bit integer" shall be 
   treated as an integers. "String" shall be treated as an IA5String 
   when encoding the protocol. 

   When a type is smaller than one octet, the value shall be stored in 
   the low-order bits of an octet string of size 1. 

    
.1   General media attributes 

    
   PropertyID   Property Type         Value 
                 tag 

   Media        1001     Enumeration  Audio(0), Video(1), Data(2) 

   Transmission 1002     Enumeration  Send(0), Receive(1), 
   mode                                 Send&Receive(2) 

   Number of    1003     Unsigned     0-255 
   Channels               integer 

   Sampling     1004     Unsigned     0-2^32 
   rate                   integer 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 139] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   PropertyID   Property Type         Value 
                 tag 

   Bitrate      1005     Integer      (0..4294967295) 

                                        NOTE û Units of 100 bit/s. 

   ACodec       1006     Octet string Audio Codec Type: 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.765.5  

                                        Non-ITU-T codecs are defined 
                                        with the appropriate 
                                        standards organization under 
                                        a defined Organizational 
                                        Identitifier. 

   Samplepp     1007     Unsigned     Maximum samples or frames 
                           integer      per packet: 0..65535 

   Silencesupp  1008     Boolean      Silence Suppression: 
                                        True/False 

   Encrypttype  1009     Octet string Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   Encryptkey   100A     Octet string Encryption key 
                           size 
                           (0..65535)   Ref.: ITU-T H.235 

   Echocanc     100B                  Not Used. See H.248.1 E.13 
                                        for an example of possible 
                                        Echo Control properties. 

   Gain         100C     Unsigned     Gain in dB: 0..65535 
                           integer 

   Jitterbuff   100D     Unsigned     Jitter buffer size in ms: 
                           integer      0..65535 

   PropDelay    100E     Unsigned     Propagation Delay: 0..65535 
                           integer 
                                        Maximum propagation delay in 
                                        milliseconds for the bearer 
                                        connection between two media 
                                        gateways. The maximum delay 
                                        will be dependent on the 
                                        bearer technology. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 140] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   PropertyID   Property Type         Value 
                 tag 

   RTPpayload   100F     Integer      Payload type in RTP Profile 
                                        for Audio and Video 
                                        Conferences with Minimal 
                                        Control 

                                        Ref.: RFC 1890 

    

    
.2   Mux properties 

    
   PropertyID   Property   Type       Value 
                tag 

   H222         2001       Octet      H222LogicalChannelParameters 
                           string 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   H223         2002       Octet      H223LogicalChannelParameters 
                           string 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   V76          2003       Octet      V76LogicalChannelParameters 
                           string 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   H2250        2004       Octet      H2250LogicalChannelParameters 
                           string 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

    

    
.3   General bearer properties 

    
   PropertyID  Property   Type       Value 
               tag 

   Mediatx     3001       Enumerati  Media Transport Type 
                           on 
                                      TDM Circuit(0), ATM(1), FR(2), 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 141] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                                      Ipv4(3), Ipv6(4), ... 

   BIR         3002       4 octets   Value depends on transport 
                                      technology 

   NSAP        3003       1-20       See NSAP. 
                           octets 
                                      Ref.: Annex A/X.213 

    

    
.4   General ATM properties 

    
  PropertyID   Property  Type        Value 
               tag  

  AESA         4001      20 octets   ATM End System Address 

  VPVC         4002      4 octets:   VPCI/VCI 
                          VPCI in 
                          first two   Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 
                          least 
                          significant 
                          octets, VCI 
                          in second 
                          two octets 

  SC           4003      Enumeration Service Category: CBR(0), nrt-
                                      VBR1(1), nrt-VBR2(2), nrt-
                                      VBR3(3), rt-VBR1(4), 
                                      rt-VBR2(5), rt-VBR3(6), 
                                      UBR1(7), UBR2(8), ABR(9). 

                                      Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0 

  BCOB         4004      5-bit       Broadband Bearer Class 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.2 

  BBTC         4005      7-bit       Broadband Transfer Capability 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 






roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 142] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


  PropertyID   Property  Type        Value 
               tag  

  ATC          4006      Enumeration I.371 ATM Traffic Capability 

                                      DBR(0), SBR1(1), SBR2(2), 
                                      SBR3(3), ABT/IT(4), ABT/DT(5), 
                                      ABR(6) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T I.371 

  STC          4007      2 bits      Susceptibility to clipping: 

                                      Bits 
                                      21 
                                      -- 
                                      00 not susceptible to clipping 
                                      01 susceptible to clipping 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

  UPCC         4008      2 bits      User Plane Connection 
                                      configuration: 

                                      Bits 
                                      21 
                                      -- 
                                      00 point-to-point 
                                      01 point-to-multipoint 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

  PCR0         4009      24-bit      Peak Cell Rate (For CLP = 0) 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

  SCR0         400A      24-bit      Sustainable Cell Rate  
                          integer     (For CLP = 0) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 

  MBS0         400B      24-bit      Maximum Burst Size  
                          integer     (For CLP = 0) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 143] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


  PropertyID   Property  Type        Value 
               tag  

  PCR1         400C      24-bit      Peak Cell Rate (For 
                          integer     CLP = 0 + 1) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

  SCR1         400D      24-bit      Sustainable Cell Rate  
                          integer     (For CLP = 0 + 1) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 

  MBS1         400E      24-bit      Maximum Burst Size  
                          integer     (For CLP = 0 + 1) 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 

  BEI          400F      Boolean     Best Effort Indicator 

                                      Value 1 indicates that BEI is 
                                      to be included in the ATM 
                                      signaling; value 0 indicates 
                                      that BEI is not to be included 
                                      in the ATM signaling. 

                                      Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0 

  TI           4010      Boolean     Tagging Indicator 

                                      Value 0 indicates that tagging 
                                      is not allowed; value 1 
                                      indicates that tagging is 
                                      requested. 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1 

  FD           4011      Boolean     Frame Discard 

                                      Value 0 indicates that no 
                                      frame discard is allowed; 
                                      value 1 indicates that frame 
                                      discard is allowed. 

                                      Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 144] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


  PropertyID   Property  Type        Value 
               tag  

  A2PCDV       4012      24-bit      Acceptable 2-point CDV 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2 

  C2PCDV       4013      24-bit      Cumulative 2-point CDV 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2 

  APPCDV       4014      24-bit      Acceptable P-P CDV 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0 

  CPPCDV       4015      24-bit      Cumulative P-P CDV 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0 

  ACLR         4016      8-bit       Acceptable Cell Loss Ratio 
                          integer 
                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM 
                                      Forum UNI 4.0 

  MEETD        4017      16-bit      Maximum End-to-end transit 
                          integer     delay 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM 
                                      Forum UNI 4.0 

  CEETD        4018      16-bit      Cumulative End-to-end transit 
                          integer     delay 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM 
                                      Forum UNI 4.0 

  QosClass     4019      Integer 0-5 QoS Class 

                                     QoS      Meaning 
                                      Class 

                                      0        Default QoS 
                                               associated with the 
                                               ATC as defined in 
                                               ITU-T Q.2961.2 

                                      1        Stringent 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 145] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


  PropertyID   Property  Type        Value 
               tag  

                                     2        Tolerant 

                                     3        Bi-level 

                                     4        Unbounded 

                                     5        Stringent Bi-level 

                                     Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.1 

  AALtype      401A      1 octet     AAL Type 

                                      Bits 
                                      87654321 
                                      -------- 
                                      00000000  AAL for voice 
                                      00000001  AAL type 1 
                                      00000010  AAL type 2 
                                      00000011  AAL type 3/4 
                                      00000101  AAL type 5 
                                      00010000  user-defined AAL 

                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

    
    
    
.5   Frame Relay 

    
   PropertyID   Property   Type         Value 
                 tag 

   DLCI         5001       Unsigned     Data link connection id 
                             integer 

   CID          5002       Unsigned     sub-channel id 
                             integer 

   SID/         5003       Unsigned     silence insertion 
   Noiselevel               integer      descriptor  

   Primary      5004       Unsigned     Primary Payload Type 
   Payload type             integer 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 146] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                                          Covers FAX and codecs  

    
    
.6   IP 

    
   PropertyID   Property   Type         Value 
                 tag 

   IPv4         6001       32 bits      Ipv4Address 
                             Ipv4Address  Ref.: IETF RFC 791 

   IPv6         6002       128 bits     IPv6 Address 
                                          Ref.: IETF RFC 2460 

   Port         6003       Unsigned     0..65535 
                             integer 

   Porttype     6004       Enumerated   TCP(0), UDP(1), SCTP(2) 

    
    
.7   ATM AAL2 

    
   PropertyID  Property  Type          Value 
               tag 

   AESA        7001      20 octets     AAL2 service endpoint 
                                        address as defined in the 
                                        referenced Recommendation. 

                                        ESEA 

                                        NSEA 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 

   BIR         See C.3   4 octets      Served user generated 
                                        reference as defined in the 
                                        referenced Recommendation. 

                                        SUGR 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 147] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   PropertyID  Property  Type          Value 
               tag 

   ALC         7002      12 octets     AAL2 link characteristics as 
                                        defined in the referenced 
                                        Recommendation. 

                                        Maximum/Average CPS-SDU bit 
                                        rate;  

                                        Maximum/Average CPS-SDU size 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 

   SSCS        7003      I.366.2:      Service specific convergence 
                                        sublayer information as 
                         Audio         defined in:  
                         (8 octets);   -  ITU-T Q.2630.1, 
                         Multirate     and used in: 
                         (3 octets), 
                         or            -  ITU-T I.366.2: 
                                        Audio/Multirate; 
                         I.366.1:  
                                        -  ITU-T I.366.1: 
                         SAR-assured   SAR-assured/-unassured. 
                         (14 octets); 
                         SAR-unassured Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1, 
                         (7 octets).   I.366.1 and I.366.2 

   SUT         7004      1..254 octets Served user transport 
                                        parameter as defined in the 
                                        referenced Recommendation. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 

   TCI         7005      Boolean       Test connection indicator as 
                                        defined in the referenced 
                                        Recommendation. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 

   Timer_CU    7006      32-bit        Timer-CU 
                         integer 
                                        Milliseconds to hold 
                                        partially filled cell before 
                                        sending. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 148] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   PropertyID  Property  Type          Value 
               tag 

   MaxCPSSDU   7007      8-bit integer Maximum Common Part Sublayer 
                                        Service Data Unit 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1 

   CID         7008      8 bits        subchannel id: 0-255 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T I.363.2 

    
    
.8   ATM AAL1 

    
   Property Property   Type     Value 
   ID       tag  

   BIR      See table  4-29     GIT (Generic Identifier Transport) 
             in C.3     octets 
                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2941.1 

   AAL1ST   8001       1 octet  AAL1 Subtype 

                                  Bits 
                                  87654321 
                                  -------- 
                                  00000000 null 
                                  00000001 voiceband signal  
                                           transport on 64 kbit/s 
                                  00000010 circuit transport 
                                  00000100 high-quality audio signal 
                                           transport 
                                  00000101 video signal transport 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   CBRR     8002       1 octet  CBR Rate 

                                  Bits 
                                  87654321 
                                  -------- 
                                  00000001        64 kbit/s 
                                  00000100      1544 kbit/s 
                                  00000101      6312 kbit/s 
                                  00000110    32 064 kbit/s 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 149] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Property Property   Type     Value 
   ID       tag  

                                  00000111    44 736 kbit/s 
                                  00001000    97 728 kbit/s 
                                  00010000      2048 kbit/s 
                                  00010001      8448 kbit/s 
                                  00010010    34 368 kbit/s 
                                  00010011   139 264 kbit/s 
                                  01000000    n . 64 kbit/s 
                                  01000001    n .  8 kbit/s 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   MULT     See table           Multiplier, or n . 64k/8k/300 
             in C.9 
                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   SCRI     8003       1 octet  Source Clock Frequency Recovery 
                                  Method 

                                  Bits 
                                  87654321 
                                  -------- 
                                  00000000    null 
                                  00000001    SRTS 
                                  00000010    ACM 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   ECM      8004       1 octet  Error Correction Method 

                                  Bits 
                                  87654321 
                                  -------- 
                                  00000000    null 
                                  00000001    FEC - Loss 
                                  00000010    FEC - Delay 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   SDTB     8005       16-bit   Structured Data Transfer Blocksize 
                        integer 
                                  Block size of SDT CBR service 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T I.363.1 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 150] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Property Property   Type     Value 
   ID       tag  

   PFCI     8006       8-bit    Partially filled cells identifier 
                        integer 
                                  1-47 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T I.363.1 

    
    
.9   Bearer capabilities 

   The table entries referencing Recommendation Q.931 refer to the 
   encoding in the bearer capability information element of Q.931, not 
   to the low layer information element. 

    
               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

   TMR         9001      1 octet Transmission Medium Requirement 
                                  (Q.763) 
                          
                                  Bits 
                                  87654321 
                                  -------- 
                                  00000000   speech 
                                  00000001   spare 
                                  00000010   64 kbit/s unrestricted 
                                  00000011   3.1 kHz audio 
                                  00000100   reserved for alternate 
                                             speech (service 2) /  
                                             64 kbit/s unrestricted  
                                             (service 1) 
                                  00000101   reserved for alternate 
                                             64 kbit/s unrestricted 
                                             (service 1) / speech 
                                             (service 2)  
                                  00000110   64 kbit/s preferred 
                                  00000111   2 Ú 64 kbit/s  
                                             unrestricted 
                                  00001000   384 kbit/s unrestricted 
                                  00001001  1536 kbit/s unrestricted 
                                  00001010  1920 kbit/s unrestricted 
                                  00001011 
                                  through           spare 
                                  00001111 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 151] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                 00010000    3 x 64 kbit/s 
                                   through          through 
                                  00101010   29 x 64 kbit/s 
                                             unrestricted 
                                  00101011 
                                  through           spare 
                                  11111111 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 

   TMRSR       9002      1 octet Transmission Medium Requirement 
                                  Subrate 

                                  0  unspecified 

                                  1  8 kbit/s 
                                  2  16 kbit/s 
                                  3  32 kbit/s 

   Contcheck   9003      Boolean Continuity Check 

                                  0  continuity check not required 
                                  on this circuit 

                                  1  continuity check required on 
                                  this circuit 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 

   ITC         9004      5 bits  Information Transfer Capability 

                                  Bits 
                                  54321 
                                  ----- 

                                  00000   Speech 

                                  01000   Unrestricted digital 
                                                information 

                                  01001   Restricted digital 
                                             information 

                                  10000   3.1 kHz audio 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 152] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  10001   Unrestricted digital 
                                             information with 
                                             tones/announcements 

                                  11000   Video 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 

   TransMode   9005      2 bits  Transfer Mode 

                                  Bits 
                                  21 
                                  -- 
                                  00 Circuit mode 
                                  10 Packet mode 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   TransRate   9006      5 bits  Transfer Rate 

                                  Bits 
                                  54321 
                                  ----- 
                                  00000    This code shall be used 
                                           for packet mode calls 
                                  10000        64 kbit/s 
                                  10001    2 . 64 kbit/s 
                                  10011       384 kbit/s 
                                  10101      1536 kbit/s 
                                  10111      1920 kbit/s 
                                  11000    Multirate (64 kbit/s 
                                              base rate) 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   MULT        9007      7 bits  Rate Multiplier 

                                  Any value from 2 to n (maximum 
                                  number of B-channels) 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 153] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

   layer1prot  9008      5 bits  User Information Layer 1 Protocol 

                                  Bits 
                                  54321 
                                  ----- 
                                  00001   ITU-T standardized rate  
                                          adaption V.110 and X.30. 
                                  00010   Recommendation G.711 .-law 
                                  00011   Recommendation G.711 A-law 
                                  00100   Recommendation G.726  
                                          32 kbit/s ADPCM and 
                                          Recommendation I.460 
                                  00101   Recommendations H.221 and 
                                          H.242 
                                  00110   Recommendations H.223 and 
                                          H.245 
                                  00111   Non-ITU-T standardized 
                                          rate adaption. 
                                  01000   ITU-T standardized rate 
                                          adaption V.120. 
                                  01001   ITU-T standardized rate 
                                          adaption X.31 HDLC flag 
                                          stuffing 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU Recommendation Q.931 
   syncasync   9009      Boolean Synchronous/Asynchronous 

                                  0  Synchronous data 
                                  1  Asynchronous data 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   negotiatio  900A      Boolean Negotiation 
   n 
                                  0 In-band negotiation possible 
                                  1 In-band negotiation not possible 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   Userrate    900B      5 bits  User Rate 

                                  54321 
                                  ----- 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 154] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  00000  Rate is indicated by E-bits 
                                         specified in Rec. I.460 or 
                                         may be negotiated in-band 
                                  00001  0.6 kbit/s Recs. V.6 & X.1 
                                  00010  1.2 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  00011  2.4 kbit/s Recs. V.6 & X.1 
                                  00100  3.6 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  00101  4.8 kbit/s Recs. V.6 & X.1 
                                  00110  7.2 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  00111    8 kbit/s Rec. I.460 
                                  01000  9.6 kbit/s Recs. V.6 & X.1 
                                  01001 14.4 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  01010   16 kbit/s Rec. I.460 
                                  01011 19.2 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  01100   32 kbit/s Rec. I.460 
                                  01101 38.4 kbit/s Rec. V.110 
                                  01110   48 kbit/s Recs. V.6 & X.1 
                                  01111   56 kbit/s Rec. V.6 
                                  10010 57.6 kbit/s Rec. V.14 
                                                    extended 
                                  10011 28.8 kbit/s Rec. V.110 
                                  10100   24 kbit/s Rec. V.110 
                                  10101    0.1345 kbit/s Rec. X.1 
                                  10110     0.100 kbit/s Rec. X.1 
                                   
                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1: 
                                  10111    0.075/1.2 kbit/s 
                                  11000    1.2/0.075 kbit/s 
                                  11001        0.050 kbit/s 
                                  11010        0.075 kbit/s 
                                  11011        0.110 kbit/s 
                                  11100        0.150 kbit/s 
                                  11101        0.200 kbit/s 
                                  11110        0.300 kbit/s 

                                  11111 12 kbit/s Rec. V.6 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   INTRATE     900C      2 bits  Intermediate Rate 

                                  Bits 
                                  21 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 155] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  -- 
                                  00  Not used 
                                  01   8 kbit/s 
                                  10  16 kbit/s 
                                  11  32 kbit/s 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   nictx       900D      Boolean Network Independent Clock (NIC) on 
                                  transmission 

                                  0  Not required to send data with 
                                  network independent clock 

                                  1  Required to send data with 
                                  network independent clock 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   nicrx       900E      Boolean Network independent clock (NIC) on 
                                  reception 

                                  0  Cannot accept data with network 
                                  independent clock (i.e. sender 
                                  does not support this optional 
                                  procedure) 

                                  1  Can accept data with network 
                                  independent clock (i.e. sender 
                                  does support this optional 
                                  procedure) 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   flowconttx  900F      Boolean Flow Control on transmission (Tx) 

                                  0  Not required to send data with 
                                  flow control mechanism 

                                  1  Required to send data with flow 
                                  control mechanism 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 156] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

   flowcontrx  9010      Boolean Flow control on reception (Rx) 

                                  0  Cannot accept data with flow 
                                  control mechanism (i.e. sender 
                                  does not support this optional 
                                  procedure) 

                                  1  Can accept data with flow 
                                  control mechanism (i.e. sender 
                                  does support this optional 
                                  procedure) 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   rateadapth  9011      Boolean Rate adaption header/no header 
   dr 
                                  0  Rate adaption header not 
                                  included 

                                  1  Rate adaption header included 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   multiframe  9012      Boolean Multiple frame establishment 
                                  support in data link 

                                  0  Multiple frame establishment 
                                  not supported. Only UI frames 
                                  allowed 

                                  1  Multiple frame establishment 
                                  supported 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   OPMODE      9013      Boolean Mode of operation 

                                  0  Bit transparent mode of 
                                  operation 

                                  1  Protocol sensitive mode of 
                                  operation 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 157] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

   llidnegot   9014      Boolean Logical link identifier 
                                  negotiation 

                                  0  Default, LLI = 256 only 

                                  1  Full protocol negotiation 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   assign      9015      Boolean Assignor/assignee 

                                  0  Message originator is "default 
                                  assignee" 

                                  1  Message originator is "assignor 
                                  only" 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   inbandneg   9016      Boolean In-band/out-band negotiation 

                                  0  Negotiation is done with USER 
                                  INFORMATION messages on a 
                                  temporary signalling connection 

                                  1  Negotiation is done in-band 
                                  using logical link zero 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   stopbits    9017      2 bits  Number of stop bits 

                                  Bits 
                                  21 
                                  -- 
                                  00  Not used 
                                  01    1 bit 
                                  10  1.5 bits 
                                  11    2 bits 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   databits    9018      2 bits  Number of data bits excluding 
                                  parity bit if present 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 158] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  Bits 
                                  21 
                                  -- 
                                  00  Not used 
                                  01  5 bits 
                                  10  7 bits 
                                  11  8 bits 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   parity      9019      3 bits  Parity information 

                                  Bits 
                                  321 
                                  --- 
                                  000   Odd 
                                  010   Even 
                                  011   None 
                                  100   Forced to 0 
                                  101   Forced to 1 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   duplexmode  901A      Boolean Mode duplex 

                                  0  Half duplex 
                                  1  Full duplex 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   modem       901B      6 bits  Modem Type 

                                  Bits 
                                  654321 
                                  ------ 
                                  000000 
                                   through    National use 
                                  000101 

                                  010001   Recommendation V.21 
                                  010010   Recommendation V.22 
                                  010011   Recommendation V.22 bis 
                                  010100   Recommendation V.23 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 159] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  010101   Recommendation V.26 
                                  011001   Recommendation V.26 bis 
                                  010111   Recommendation V.26 ter 
                                  011000   RecommendationV.27 
                                  011001   Recommendation V.27 bis 
                                  011010   Recommendation V.27 ter 
                                  011011   Recommendation V.29 
                                  011101   Recommendation V.32 
                                  011110   Recommendation V.34 

                                  100000 
                                   through    National use 
                                  101111 

                                  110000 
                                   through    User specified 
                                  111111 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   layer2prot  901C      5 bits  User information layer 2 protocol 

                                  Bits 
                                  54321 
                                  ----- 

                                  00010  Rec. Q.921 / I.441 

                                  00110  Rec. X.25, link layer 

                                  01100  LAN logical link control 

                                         (ISO/IEC 8802-2) 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   layer3prot  901D      5 bits  User information layer 3 protocol 

                                  Bits 
                                  54321 
                                  ----- 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 160] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  00010  ITU-T Q.931 

                                  00110  ITU-T X.25, packet layer 

                                  01011  ISO/IEC TR 9577 (Protocol 
                                         identification in the 
                                         network layer) 

                                  All other values are reserved. 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   addlayer3p  901E      Octet   Additional User Information layer 
   rot                            3 protocol 

                                  Bits  Bits 
                                  4321  4321 
                                  ----  ---- 

                                  1100  1100  Internet Protocol 
                                              (RFC 791)  
                                              (ISO/IEC TR 9577) 

                                  1100  1111  Point-to-point 
                                              Protocol (RFC 1661) 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931 

   DialledN    901F      30      Dialled Number 
                         octets 

   DiallingN   9020      30      Dialling Number 
                         octets 

   ECHOCI      9021              Not Used. See H.248.1 E.13 for an 
                                  example of possible Echo Control 
                                  properties. 

   NCI         9022      1 octet Nature of Connection Indicators 

                                  Bits 
                                  21    Satellite Indicator 
                                  -- 
                                  00  no satellite circuit in the 
                                      connection 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 161] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               Property    PropertyID            Type    Value                tag 

                                  01  one satellite circuit in the 
                                      connection 
                                  10  two satellite circuits in the 
                                      connection 
                                  11  spare 

                                  Bits 
                                  43    Continuity check indicator 
                                  -- 
                                  00  continuity check not required 
                                  01  continuity check required on 
                                      this circuit 
                                  10  continuity check performed on 
                                      a previous circuit 
                                  11  spare 

                                  Bit 
                                  5    Echo control device indicator 
                                  -  
                                  0  outgoing echo control device 
                                     not included 
                                  1  outgoing echo control device 
                                     included 

                                  Bits 
                                  8 7 6    Spare 

                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 

   USI         9023      Octet   User Service Information 
                         string 
                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 Clause 3.57 

    
    
.10  AAL5 properties 

    
   PropertyID  Property Type       Value 
               tag 

   FMSDU       A001     32-bit     Forward Maximum CPCS-SDU Size: 
                         integer 
                                    Maximum CPCS-SDU size sent in 
                                    the direction from the calling 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 162] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                                    user to the called user. 

                                    Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   BMSDU       A002     32-bit     Backwards Maximum CPCS-SDU 
                         integer    Size: 

                                    Maximum CPCS-SDU size sent in 
                                    the direction from the called 
                                    user to the calling user. 

                                    Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931 

   SSCS        See      See table  See table in C.7 
               table in in C.7 
               C.7                  Additional values: 

                                    VPI/VCI 

    
    
.11  SDP equivalents 

    
   PropertyID    Property   Type       Value 
                 tag  

   SDP_V         B001       String     Protocol Version 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_O         B002       String     Owner/creator and session ID 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_S         B003       String     Session name 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_I         B004       String     Session identifier 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_U         B005       String     URI of descriptor 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 163] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   SDC_E         B006       String     email address 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_P         B007       String     phone number 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_C         B008       String     Connection information 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_B         B009       String     Bandwidth Information 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_Z         B00A       String     Time zone adjustment 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_K         B00B       String     Encryption Key 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_A         B00C       String     Zero or more session 
                                        attributes 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_T         B00D       String     Active Session Time 

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

   SDP_R         B00E       String     Zero or more repeat times 

                                        Reference: RFC 2327 

   SDP_M         B00F       String     Media type, port, transport 
                                        and format  

                                        Ref.: RFC 2327 

    
    






roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 164] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.12  H.245 

    
   PropertyID   Property   Type       Value 
                 tag  

   OLC          C001       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     OpenLogicalChannel 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   OLCack       C002       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     OpenLogicalChannelAck 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   OLCcnf       C003       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     OpenLogicalChannelConfirm 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   OLCrej       C004       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     OpenLogicalChannelReject 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   CLC          C005       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     CloseLogicalChannel 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

   CLCack       C006       Octet      The value of H.245 
                            string     CloseLogicalChannelAck 
                                        structure. 

                                        Ref.: ITU-T H.245 

    
    






roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 165] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


NNEX D  TRANSPORT OVER IP 

.1   Transport over IP/UDP using Application Level Framing (ALF) 

   Protocol messages defined in this Recommendation may be transmitted 
   over UDP. When no port is provided by the peer (see 7.2.8), commands 
   SHOULD be sent to the default port number: 2944 for text-encoded 
   operation, or 2945 for binary-encoded operation. Responses must be 
   sent to the address and port from which the corresponding commands 
   were sent. 

   ALF is a set of techniques that allows an application, as opposed to 
   a stack, to affect how messages are sent to the other side. A typical 
   ALF technique is to allow an application to change the order of 
   messages sent when there is a queue after it has queued them.  There 
   is no formal specification for ALF. The procedures in Annex D.1 
   contain a minimum suggested set of ALF behaviours 

   Implementors using IP/UDP with ALF SHOULD be aware of the 
   restrictions of the MTU on the maximum message size. 

.1.1 Providing At-Most-Once functionality 

   Messages, being carried over UDP, may be subject to losses. In the 
   absence of a timely response, commands are repeated. Most commands 
   are not idempotent. The state of the MG would become unpredictable 
   if, for example, Add commands were executed several times. The 
   transmission procedures shall thus provide an "At-Most-Once" 
   functionality. 

   Peer protocol entities are expected to keep in memory a list of the 
   responses that they sent to recent transactions and a list of the 
   transactions that are currently outstanding. The transaction 
   identifier of each incoming message is compared to the transaction 
   identifiers of the recent responses sent to the same MId. If a match 
   is found, the entity does not execute the transaction, but simply 
   repeats the response. If no match is found, the message will be 
   compared to the list of currently outstanding transactions. If a 
   match is found in that list, indicating a duplicate transaction, the 
   entity does not execute the transaction (see D.1.4 for procedures on 
   sending TransactionPending). 

   The procedure uses a long timer value, noted LONG-TIMER in the 
   following. The timer SHOULD be set larger than the maximum duration 
   of a transaction, which SHOULD take into account the maximum number 
   of repetitions, the maximum value of the repetition timer and the 
   maximum propagation delay of a packet in the network. A suggested 
   value is 30 seconds. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 166] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   The copy of the responses may be destroyed either LONG-TIMER seconds 
   after the response is issued, or when the entity receives a 
   confirmation that the response has been received, through the 
   "Response Acknowledgement parameter". For transactions that are 
   acknowledged through this parameter, the entity shall keep a copy of 
   the transaction-id for LONG-TIMER seconds after the response is 
   issued, in order to detect and ignore duplicate copies of the 
   transaction request that could be produced by the network. 

.1.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake 

.1.2.1  Transaction identifiers 

   Transaction identifiers are 32-bit integer numbers. A Media Gateway 
   Controller may decide to use a specific number space for each of the 
   MGs that they manage, or to use the same number space for all MGs 
   that belong to some arbitrary group. MGCs may decide to share the 
   load of managing a large MG between several independent processes. 
   These processes will share the same transaction number space. There 
   are multiple possible implementations of this sharing, such as having 
   a centralized allocation of transaction identifiers, or pre-
   allocating non-overlapping ranges of identifiers to different 
   processes. The implementations shall guarantee that unique 
   transaction identifiers are allocated to all transactions that 
   originate from a logical MGC (identical mId). MGs can simply detect 
   duplicate transactions by looking at the transaction identifier and 
   mId only. 

.1.2.2  Three-way handshake 

   The TransactionResponse Acknowledgement parameter can be found in any 
   message. It carries a set of "confirmed transaction-id ranges". 
   Entities may choose to delete the copies of the responses to 
   transactions whose id is included in "confirmed transaction-id 
   ranges" received in the transaction response messages. They SHOULD 
   silently discard further commands when the transaction-id falls 
   within these ranges. 

   The "confirmed transaction-id ranges" values shall not be used if 
   more than LONG-TIMER seconds have elapsed since the MG issued its 
   last response to that MGC, or when a MG resumes operation. In this 
   situation, transactions SHOULD be accepted and processed, without any 
   test on the transaction id. 

   Messages that carry the "Transaction Response Acknowledgement" 
   parameter may be transmitted in any order. The entity shall retain 
   the "confirmed transaction-id ranges" receivedfor LONG-TIMER seconds. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 167] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   In the binary encoding, if only the firstAck is present in a response 
   acknowledgement (see A.2), only one transaction is acknowledged. If 
   both firstAck and lastAck are present, then the range of transactions 
   from firstAck to lastAck is acknowledged. In the text encoding, a 
   horizontal dash is used to indicate a range of transactions being 
   acknowledged (see B.2). 

.1.3 Computing retransmission timers 

   It is the responsibility of the requesting entity to provide suitable 
   timeouts for all outstanding transactions, and to retry transactions 
   when timeouts have been exceeded. Furthermore, when repeated 
   transactions fail to be acknowledged, it is the responsibility of the 
   requesting entity to seek redundant services and/or clear existing or 
   pending connections. 

   The specification purposely avoids specifying any value for the 
   retransmission timers. These values are typically network dependent. 
   The retransmission timers SHOULD normally estimate the timer value by 
   measuring the time spent between the sending of a command and the 
   return of a response. Implementations SHALL ensure that the algorithm 
   used to calculate retransmission timing performs an exponentially 
   increasing backoff of the retransmission timeout for each 
   retransmission or repetition after the first one. 

   NOTE - One possibility is to use the algorithm implemented in TCP-IP, 
      which uses two variables: 

   ò  The average acknowledgement delay (AAD), estimated through an 
      exponentially smoothed average of the observed delays. 

   ò  The average deviation (ADEV), estimated through an exponentially 
      smoothed average of the absolute value of the difference between 
      the observed delay and the current average. The retransmission 
      timer, in TCP, is set to the sum of the average delay plus N times 
      the average deviation. The maximum value of the timer SHOULD 
      however be bounded for the protocol defined in this 
      Recommendation, in order to guarantee that no repeated packet 
      would be received by the gateways after LONG-TIMER seconds. A 
      suggested maximum value is 4 seconds. 

   After any retransmission, the entity SHOULD do the following: 

   ò  It SHOULD double the estimated value of the average delay, AAD. 

   ò  It SHOULD compute a random value, uniformly distributed between 
      0.5 AAD and AAD. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 168] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ò  It SHOULD set the retransmission timer to the sum of that random 
      value and N times the average deviation. 

   This procedure has two effects. Because it includes an exponentially 
   increasing component, it will automatically slow down the stream of 
   messages in case of congestion. Because it includes a random 
   component, it will break the potential synchronization between 
   notifications triggered by the same external event. 

.1.4 Provisional responses 

   Executing some transactions may require a long time. Long execution 
   times may interact with the timer-based retransmission procedure. 
   This may result either in an inordinate number of retransmissions, or 
   in timer values that become too long to be efficient. Entities that 
   can predict that a transaction will require a long execution time may 
   send a provisional response, "Transaction Pending". They SHOULD send 
   this response if they receive a repetition of a transaction that is 
   still being executed. 

   Entities that receive a Transaction Pending shall switch to a 
   different repetition timer for repeating requests. The root 
   Termination has a property (ProvisionalResponseTimerValue), which can 
   be set to the requested maximum number of milliseconds between 
   receipt of a command and transmission of the TransactionPending 
   response. Upon receipt of a final response following receipt of 
   provisional responses, an immediate confirmation shall be sent, and 
   normal repetition timers shall be used thereafter. An entity that 
   sends a provisional response, SHALL include the immAckRequired field 
   in the ensuing final response, indicating that an immediate 
   confirmation is expected. Receipt of a Transaction Pending after 
   receipt of a reply shall be ignored. 

.1.5 Repeating Requests, Responses and Acknowledgements 

   The protocol is organized as a set of transactions, each of which is 
   composed request and a response, commonly referred to as an 
   acknowledgement. The protocol messages, being carried over UDP, may 
   be subject to losses. In the absence of a timely response, 
   transactions are repeated. Entities are expected to keep in memory a 
   list of the responses that they sent to recent transactions, i.e. a 
   list of all the responses they sent over the last LONG-TIMER seconds, 
   and a list of the transactions that are currently being executed. 

   The repetition mechanism is used to guard against three types of 
   possible errors: 

   ò  transmission errors, when for example a packet is lost due to 
      noise on a line or congestion in a queue; 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 169] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   ò  component failure, when for example an interface to a entity 
      becomes unavailable; 

   ò  entity failure, when for example an entire entity become 
      unavailable. 

   The entities SHOULD be able to derive from the past history an 
   estimate of the packet loss rate due to transmission errors. In a 
   properly configured system, this loss rate SHOULD be kept very low, 
   typically less than 1%. If a Media Gateway Controller or a Media 
   Gateway has to repeat a message more than a few times, it is very 
   legitimate to assume that something else than a transmission error is 
   occurring. For example, given a loss rate of 1%, the probability that 
   five consecutive transmission attempts fail is 1 in 100 billion, an 
   event that SHOULD occur less than once every 10 days for a Media 
   Gateway Controller that processes 1000 transactions per second. 
   (Indeed, the number of repetition that is considered excessive SHOULD 
   be a function of the prevailing packet loss rate.) We SHOULD note 
   that the "suspicion threshold", which we will call "Max1", is 
   normally lower than the "disconnection threshold", which SHOULD be 
   set to a larger value. 

   A classic retransmission algorithm would simply count the number of 
   successive repetitions, and conclude that the association is broken 
   after retransmitting the packet an excessive number of times 
   (typically between 7 and 11 times.) In order to account for the 
   possibility of an undetected or in progress "failover", we modify the 
   classic algorithm so that if the Media Gateway receives a valid 
   ServiceChange message announcing a failover, it will start 
   transmitting outstanding commands to that new MGC. Responses to 
   commands are still transmitted to the source address of the command. 

   In order to automatically adapt to network load, this Recommendation 
   specifies exponentially increasing timers. If the initial timer is 
   set to 200 milliseconds, the loss of a fifth retransmission will be 
   detected after about 6 seconds. This is probably an acceptable 
   waiting delay to detect a failover. The repetitions SHOULD continue 
   after that delay not only in order to perhaps overcome a transient 
   connectivity problem, but also in order to allow some more time for 
   the execution of a failover  (waiting a total delay of 30 seconds is 
   probably acceptable). 

   It is, however, important that the maximum delay of retransmissions 
   be bounded. Prior to any retransmission, it is checked that the time 
   elapsed since the sending of the initial datagram is no greater than 
   T-MAX. If more than T-MAX time has elapsed, the MG concludes that the 
   MGC has failed, and it begins its recovery process as described in 
   section 11.5. If the MG retries to connect to the current MGC it 
   shall use a ServiceChange with ServiceChangeMethod set to 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 170] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Disconnected so that the new MGC will be aware that the MG lost one 
   or more transactions. The value T-MAX is related to the LONG-TIMER 
   value: the LONG-TIMER value is obtained by adding to T MAX the 
   maximum propagation delay in the network. 

.2   Using TCP 

   Protocol messages as defined in this Recommendation may be 
   transmitted over TCP. When no port is specified by the other side 
   (see 7.2.8), the commands SHOULD be sent to the default port. The 
   defined protocol has messages as the unit of transfer, while TCP is a 
   stream-oriented protocol. TPKT, according to RFC 1006, SHALL be used 
   to delineate messages within the TCP stream. 

   In a transaction-oriented protocol, there are still ways for 
   transaction requests or responses to be lost. As such, it is 
   recommended that entities using TCP transport implement application 
   level timers for each request and each response, similar to those 
   specified for application level framing over UDP. 

.2.1 Providing the At-Most-Once functionality 

   Messages, being carried over TCP, are not subject to transport 
   losses, but loss of a transaction request or its reply may 
   nonetheless be noted in real implementations. In the absence of a 
   timely response, commands are repeated. Most commands are not 
   idempotent. The state of the MG would become unpredictable if, for 
   example, Add commands were executed several times.  

   To guard against such losses, it is recommended that entities follow 
   the procedures in D.1.1. 

.2.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake 

   For the same reasons, it is possible that transaction replies may be 
   lost even with a reliable delivery protocol such as TCP. It is 
   recommended that entities follow the procedures in D.1.2.2. 

.2.3 Computing retransmission timers 

   With reliable delivery, the incidence of loss of a transaction 
   request or reply is expected to be very low. Therefore, only simple 
   timer mechanisms are required. Exponential back-off algorithms SHOULD 
   not be necessary, although they could be employed where, as in an 
   MGC, the code to do so is already required, since MGCs must implement 
   ALF/UDP as well as TCP. 





roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 171] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.2.4 Provisional responses 

   As with UDP, executing some transactions may require a long time. 
   Entities that can predict that a transaction will require a long 
   execution time may send a provisional response, "Transaction 
   Pending". They SHOULD send this response if they receive a repetition 
   of a transaction that is still being executed. 

   Entities that receive a Transaction Pending shall switch to a longer 
   repetition timer for that transaction. 

   Entities shall retain Transactions and replies until they are 
   confirmed. The basic procedure of D.1.4 SHOULD be followed, but 
   simple timer values SHOULD be sufficient. There is no need to send an 
   immediate confirmation upon receipt of a final response. 

.2.5 Ordering of commands 

   TCP provides ordered delivery of transactions. No special procedures 
   are required. It SHOULD be noted that ALF/UDP allows sending entity 
   to modify its behaviour under congestion, and in particular, could 
   reorder transactions when congestion is encountered. TCP could not 
   achieve the same results. 




























roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 172] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


NNEX E  BASIC PACKAGES 

   This annex contains definitions of some packages for use with 
   Recommendation H.248.1. 

.1   Generic 

   PackageID: g (0x0001) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   Description: 
      Generic package for commonly encountered items 

.1.1 Properties 

   None 

.1.2 Events 

   Cause 

      EventID: cause (0x0001) 

      Generic error event 

      EventsDescriptor parameters:  None 

      ObservedEvents Descriptor Parameters: 

         General Cause 

            ParameterID: Generalcause (0x0001) 

            This parameter groups the failures into six groups, which 
            the MGC may act upon. 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: 
                  "NR" Normal Release (0x0001) 
                  "UR" Unavailable Resources (0x0002) 
                  "FT" Failure, Temporary (0x0003) 
                  "FP" Failure, Permanent (0x0004) 
                  "IW" Interworking Error (0x0005) 
                  "UN" Unsupported (0x0006) 

         Failure Cause 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 173] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            ParameterID: Failurecause (0x0002) 

            Possible values:  OCTET STRING 

            Description: The Failure Cause is the value generated by the 
            Released equipment, i.e. a released network connection. The 
            concerned value is defined in the appropriate bearer control 
            protocol. 

    
   Signal Completion 

      EventID: sc (0x0002) 

      Indicates the termination of a signal for which the 
      notifyCompletion parameter was set to enable reporting of a 
      completion event. For further procedural description, see 7.1.1, 
      7.1.17 and 7.2.7. 

      EventsDescriptor parameters:  None 

      ObservedEvents Descriptor parameters: 

         Signal Identity 

            ParameterID: SigID (0x0001) 

            This parameter identifies the signal which has terminated. 
            For a signal that is contained in a signal list, the signal 
            list identity parameter SHOULD also be returned indicating 
            the appropriate list. 

            Type: Binary: octet (string), Text: string 

            Possible values: a signal which has terminated. A signal 
            shall be identified using the pkgdName syntax without 
            wildcarding. 

         Termination Method 

            ParameterID: Meth (0x0002) 

            Indicates the means by which the signal terminated. 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: 
               "TO" (0x0001) Signal timed out or otherwise completed on 
                             its own 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 174] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


               "EV" (0x0002) Interrupted by event 
               "SD" (0x0003) Halted by new Signals descriptor 
               "NC" (0x0004) Not completed, other cause 

         Signal List ID 

            ParameterID:  SLID (0x0003) 

            Indicates to which signal list a signal belongs. The 
            SignalList ID is only returned in cases where the signal 
            resides in a signal list. 

            Type: integer 

            Possible values: any integer 

.1.3 Signals 

   None. 

.1.4 Statistics 

   None. 

    

.2   Base Root Package 

   Base Root Package 

   PackageID: root (0x0002) 
   Version: 2 
   Extends: None 

   Description: 

   This package defines Gateway wide properties. 

.2.1 Properties 

   MaxNumberOfContexts 

      PropertyID: maxNumberOfContexts (0x0001) 

      The value of this property gives the maximum number of contexts 
      that can exist at any time. The NULL context is not included in 
      this number. 

      Type: double 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 175] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Possible values: 1 and up 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read only 

    
   MaxTerminationsPerContext 

      PropertyID: maxTerminationsPerContext (0x0002) 

      The maximum number of allowed terminations in a context, see 6.1 

      Type: integer 

      Possible values: any integer 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read only 

    
   normalMGExecutionTime 

      PropertyId: normalMGExecutionTime (0x0003) 

      Settable by the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MGC 
      expects a response to any transaction from the MG (exclusive of 
      network delay) 

      Type: integer 

      Possible values: any integer, represents milliseconds 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read / write 

    
   normalMGCExecutionTime 

      PropertyId: normalMGCExecutionTime (0x0004) 

      Settable by the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MG 
      SHOULD expects a response to any transaction from the MGC 
      (exclusive of network delay) 

      Type: integer 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 176] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Possible values: any integer, represents milliseconds 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read / write 

    
   MGProvisionalResponseTimerValue 

      PropertyId: MGProvisionalResponseTimerValue (0x0005) 

      Indicates the time within which the MGC SHOULD expect a Pending 
      Response from the MG if a Transaction cannot be completed. 
      Initially set to normalMGExecutionTime plus network delay, but may 
      be lowered. 

      Type: Integer 

      Possible Values: any integer, represents milliseconds 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read / write  

    
   MGCProvisionalResponseTimerValue 

      PropertyId: MGCProvisionalResponseTimerValue (0x0006) 

      Indicates the time within which the MG SHOULD expect a Pending 
      Response from the MGC if a Transaction cannot be completed.  
      Initially set to normalMGCExecutionTime plus network delay, but 
      may be lowered. 

      Type: Integer 

      Possible Values: any integer, represents milliseconds 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: read / write 

    
   MGCOriginatedPendingLimit 

      PropertyId: MGCOriginatedPendingLimit (0x0007) 

      Indicates the number of TransactionPendings that can be received 
      from the MGC. Once this limit is exceeded the MGC SHOULD issue a 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 177] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      TransactionReply with Error 506   Number of TransactionPendings 
      Exceeded, otherwise the MG can assume the Transaction to be in 
      error. 

      Type: Integer 

      Possible Values: any possible integer 

      Defined in: TerminationState 

      Characteristics: Read/Write 

    
   MGOriginatedPendingLimit  

      PropertyId: MGOriginatedPendingLimit (0x0008) 

      Indicates the number of TransactionPendings that can be received 
      from the MG. Once this limit is exceeded the MG SHOULD issue a 
      TransactionReply with Error 506   Number of TransactionPendings 
      Exceeded, otherwise the MGC can assume the Transaction to be in 
      error.  

      Type: Integer 

      Possible Values: any possible integer 

      Defined in: TerminationState  

      Characteristics: Read/Write 

.2.2 Events 

   None. 

.2.3 Signals 

   None. 

.2.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.2.5 Procedures 

   None. 

    



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 178] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.3   Tone Generator Package 

   PackageID: tonegen (0x0003) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   Description: 

   This package defines signals to generate audio tones. This package 
   does not specify parameter values. It is intended to be extendable. 
   Generally, tones are defined as an individual signal with a 
   parameter, ind, representing "interdigit" time delay, and a tone id 
   to be used with playtones. A tone id SHOULD be kept consistent with 
   any tone generation for the same tone. MGs are expected to be 
   provisioned with the characteristics of appropriate tones for the 
   country in which the MG is located. 

   Designed to be extended only: Yes  

.3.1 Properties 

   None. 

.3.2 Events 

   None. 

.3.3 Signals 

   Play tone 

      SignalID: pt (0x0001) 

      Plays audio tone over an audio channel 

      Signal Type: Brief 

      Duration: Provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 

         Tone id list 

            ParameterID: tl (0x0001) 

            Type: list of tone ids 

            List of tones to be played in sequence. The list SHALL 
            contain one or more tone ids. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 179] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         Inter signal duration 

            ParameterID: ind (0x0002) 

            Type: integer 

            Timeout between two consecutive tones in milliseconds 

   No tone ids are specified in this package. Packages that extend this 
   package can add possible values for tone id as well as adding 
   individual tone signals. 

.3.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.3.5 Procedures 

   None. 

    

.4   Tone Detection Package 

   PackageID: tonedet (0x0004) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   Designed to be extended only: Yes 

   This Package defines events for audio tone detection. Tones are 
   selected by name (tone id). MGs are expected to be provisioned with 
   the characteristics of appropriate tones for the country in which the 
   MG is located.  

   This package does not specify parameter values. It is intended to be 
   extendable.  

.4.1 Properties 

   None. 

.4.2 Events 

   Start tone detected 

      EventID: std, 0x0001 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 180] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Detects the start of a tone. The characteristics of positive tone 
      detection are implementation dependent. 

      EventsDescriptor parameters: 

         Tone id list 

            ParameterID: tl (0x0001) 

            Type: list of tone ids 

            Possible values: The only tone id defined in this package is 
            "wild card" which is "*" in text encoding and 0x0000 in 
            binary. Extensions to this package would add possible values 
            for tone id. If tl is "wild card", any tone id is detected. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters: 

         Tone id  

            ParameterID: tid (0x0003) 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only 
            value defined in this package. Extensions to this package 
            would add additional possible values for tone id. 

    
   End tone detected 

      EventID: etd, 0x0002 

      Detects the end of a tone. 

      EventDescriptor parameters: 

         Tone id list 

            ParameterID: tl (0x0001) 

            Type: enumeration or list of enumerated types 

            Possible values: No possible values are specified in this 
            package. Extensions to this package would add possible 
            values for tone id. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters: 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 181] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         Tone id 

            ParameterID: tid (0x0003) 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only 
            value defined in this package. Extensions to this package 
            would add possible values for tone id. 

         Duration 

            ParameterId: dur (0x0002) 

            Type: integer, in milliseconds 

            This parameter contains the duration of the tone from first 
            detection until it stopped. 

    
   Long tone detected 

      EventID: ltd, 0x0003 

      Detects that a tone has been playing for at least a certain amount 
      of time 

      EventDescriptor parameters: 

         Tone id list 

            ParameterID: tl (0x0001) 

            Type: enumeration or list 

            Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only 
            value defined in this package. Extensions to this package 
            would add possible values for tone id. 

         Duration: 

            ParameterID: dur (0x0002) 

            Type: integer, duration to test against 

            Possible values: any legal integer, expressed in 
            milliseconds 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 182] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters: 

         Tone id:  

            ParameterID: tid (0x0003) 

            Type: Enumeration 

            Possible values: No possible values are specified in this 
            package. Extensions to this package would add possible 
            values for tone id. 

.4.3 Signals 

   None. 

.4.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.4.5 Procedures 

   None. 

    

.5   Basic DTMF Generator Package 

   PackageID: dg (0x0005) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: tonegen version 1 

   This package defines the basic DTMF tones as signals and extends the 
   allowed values of parameter tl of playtone in tonegen.  

.5.1 Properties 

   None. 

.5.2 Events 

   None. 

.5.3 Signals 

   DTMF character 0 

      SignalID: d0 (0x0010) 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 183] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Generate DTMF 0 tone. The physical characteristic of DTMF 0 is 
      defined in the gateway.  

      Signal Type: Brief 

      Duration: Provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 

         None  

      Additional values: 

         d0 (0x0010) is defined as a tone id for playtone 

         The other DTMF characters are specified in exactly the same 
         way. A table with all signal names and signal IDs is included. 
         Note that each DTMF character is defined as both a signal and a 
         tone id, thus extending the basic tone generation package. Also 
         note that DTMF SignalIds are different from the names used in a 
         digit map. 

                  Signal name          Signal ID/Tone id 

                  DTMF character 0     d0 (0x0010) 
                  DTMF character 1     d1 (0x0011) 
                  DTMF character 2     d2 (0x0012) 
                  DTMF character 3     d3 (0x0013) 
                  DTMF character 4     d4 (0x0014) 
                  DTMF character 5     d5 (0x0015) 
                  DTMF character 6     d6 (0x0016) 
                  DTMF character 7     d7 (0x0017) 
                  DTMF character 8     d8 (0x0018) 
                  DTMF character 9     d9 (0x0019) 
                  DTMF character *     ds (0x0020) 
                  DTMF character #     do (0x0021) 
                  DTMF character A     da (0x001a) 
                  DTMF character B     db (0x001b) 
                  DTMF character C     dc (0x001c) 
                  DTMF character D     dd (0x001d) 
    
.5.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.5.5 Procedures 

   None. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 184] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    

.6   DTMF detection Package 

   PackageID: dd (0x0006) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: tonedet version 1 

   This package defines the basic DTMF tones detection. This Package 
   extends the possible values of tone id in the "start tone detected" 
   "end tone detected" and "long tone detected" events. 

   Additional tone id values are all tone ids described in package dg 
   (basic DTMF generator package).  

   The following table maps DTMF events to digit map symbols as 
   described in 7.1.14. 

                    DTMF    Event Symbol 

                    d0      "0" 
                    d1      "1" 
                    d2      "2" 
                    d3      "3" 
                    d4      "4" 
                    d5      "5" 
                    d6      "6" 
                    d7      "7" 
                    d8      "8" 
                    d9      "9" 
                    da      "A" or "a" 
                    db      "B" or "b" 
                    dc      "C" or "c" 
                    dd      "D" or "d" 
                    ds      "E" or "e" 
                    do      "F" or "f" 
    

.6.1 Properties 

   None. 

.6.2 Events 

   DTMF digits 

   EventIds are defined with the same names as the SignalIds defined in 
   the table found in E.5.3. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 185] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    

   DigitMap Completion Event 

      EventID: ce, 0x0004 

      Generated when a digit map completes as described in 7.1.14. 

      EventsDescriptor parameters: None. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters: 

         DigitString 

            ParameterID: ds (0x0001) 

            Type: string of digit map symbols (possibly empty) returned 
            as a quotedString 

            Possible values: a sequence of the characters "0" through 
            "9", "A" through "F", and the long duration modifier "Z". 

            Description: the portion of the current dial string as 
            described in 7.1.14 which matched part or all of an 
            alternative event sequence specified in the digit map. 

         Termination Method 

            ParameterID: Meth (0x0003) 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: 

            "UM" (0x0001) Unambiguous match 

            "PM" (0x0002) Partial match, completion by timer expiry or 
            unmatched event 

            "FM" (0x0003) Full match, completion by timer expiry or 
            unmatched event 

            Description: indicates the reason for generation of the 
            event. See the procedures in 7.1.14. 

.6.3 Signals 

   None. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 186] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.6.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.6.5 Procedures 

   Digit map processing is activated only if an events descriptor is 
   activated that contains a digit map completion event as defined in 
   Section E.6.2 and that digit map completion event contains an eventDM 
   field in the requested actions as defined in Section 7.1.9.  Other 
   parameters such as KeepActive or embedded events of signals 
   descriptors may also be present in the events descriptor and do not 
   affect the activation of digit map processing. 

    

.7   Call Progress Tones Generator Package 

   PackageID: cg, 0x0007 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: tonegen version 1 

   This package defines the basic call progress tones as signals and 
   extends the allowed values of the tl parameter of playtone in 
   tonegen. 

.7.1 Properties 

   None. 

.7.2 Events 

   None. 

.7.3 Signals 

   Dial Tone 

      SignalID: dt (0x0030) 

      Generate dial tone. The physical characteristic of dial tone is 
      available in the gateway. 

      Signal Type: TimeOut 

      Duration: Provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 187] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         None 

      Additional values: 

         dt (0x0030) is defined as a tone id for playtone 

   The other tones of this package are defined in exactly the same way. 
   A table with all signal names and signal IDs is included. Note that 
   each tone is defined as both a signal and a tone id, thus extending 
   the basic tone generation package. 

          Signal Name                   Signal ID/tone id 

          Dial Tone                     dt (0x0030) 

          Ringing Tone                  rt (0x0031) 

          Busy Tone                     bt (0x0032) 

          Congestion Tone               ct (0x0033) 

          Special Information Tone      sit(0x0034) 

          (Recording) Warning Tone      wt (0x0035) 

          Payphone Recognition Tone     prt (0x0036) 

          Call Waiting Tone             cw (0x0037) 

          Caller Waiting Tone           cr (0x0038) 

    

.7.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.7.5 Procedures 

   NOTE - The required set of tone ids corresponds to those defined in 
   Recommendation E.180/Q.35. See Recommendation E.180/Q.35 for 
   definition of the meanings of these tones. 

    

.8   Call Progress Tones Detection Package 

   PackageID: cd (0x0008) 
   Version: 1 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 188] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Extends: tonedet version 1 

   This package defines the basic call progress detection tones. This 
   package extends the possible values of tone id in the "start tone 
   detected", "end tone detected" and "long tone detected" events. 

   Additional values 

      tone id values are defined for start tone detected, end tone 
      detected and long tone detected with the same values as those in 
      package cg (call progress tones generation package). 

      The required set of tone ids corresponds to Recommendation 
      E.180/Q.35. See Recommendation E.180/Q.35 for definition of the 
      meanings of these tones. 

.8.1 Properties 

   None. 

.8.2 Events 

   Events are defined as in the call progress tones generator package 
   (cg) for the tones listed in the table of E.7.3. 

.8.3 Signals 

   None. 

.8.4 Statistics 

   None. 

.8.5 Procedures 

   None. 

    

.9   Analog Line Supervision Package 

   PackageID: al, 0x0009 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   This package defines events and signals for an analog line.  





roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 189] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.9.1 Properties 

   None 

.9.2 Events 

   onhook 

      EventID: on (0x0004) 

      Detects handset going on hook. Whenever an events descriptor is 
      activated that requests monitoring for an on-hook event and the 
      line is already on-hook, then the MG shall behave according to the 
      setting of the "strict" parameter. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         Strict Transition 
         ParameterID: strict (0x0001) 

         Type: enumeration 

         Possible values:  

            "exact" (0x00): only an actual hook state transition to on-
            hook is to be recognized; 

            "state" (0x01): the event is to be recognized either if the 
            hook state transition is detected or if the hook state is 
            already on-hook; 

            "failWrong" (0x02): if the hook state is already on-hook, 
            the command fails and an error is reported. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         Initial State 
         ParameterID: init (0x0002) 

         Type: Boolean 

         Possible values: 

            "True" means that the event was reported because the line 
            was already on-hook when the events descriptor containing 
            this event was activated; 

            "False" means that the event represents an actual state 
            transition to on-hook. 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 190] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


    
   offhook 

      EventID: of (0x0005) 

      Detects handset going off hook. Whenever an events descriptor is 
      activated that requests monitoring for an off-hook event and the 
      line is already off-hook, then the MG shall behave according to 
      the setting of the "strict" parameter. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         Strict Transition 
         ParameterID: strict (0x0001) 

         Type: enumeration 

         Possible values:   

            "exact" (0x00): only an actual hook state transition to off-
            hook is to be recognized; 

            "state" (0x01): the event is to be recognized either if the 
            hook state transition is detected or if the hook state is 
            already off-hook; 

            "failWrong" (0x02): if the hook state is already off-hook, 
            the command fails and an error is reported. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         Initial State 
         ParameterID: init (0x0002) 

         Type: Boolean 

         Possible values:  

            "True" means that the event was reported because the line 
            was already off-hook when the events descriptor containing 
            this event was activated; 

            "False" means that the event represents an actual state 
            transition to off-hook. 

    

   flashhook 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 191] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      EventID: fl, 0x0006 

      Detects handset flash. A flash occurs when an onhook is followed 
      by an offhook between a minimum and maximum duration. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         Minimum duration 

            ParameterID: mindur (0x0004) 

            Type: integer in milliseconds 

            Default value is provisioned. 

         Maximum duration 

            ParameterID: maxdur (0x0005) 

            Type: integer in milliseconds 

            Default value is provisioned. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         None 

.9.3 Signals 

   ring 

      SignalID: ri, 0x0002 

      Applies ringing on the line 

      Signal Type: TimeOut 

      Duration: Provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 

         Cadence 

            ParameterID: cad (0x0006) 

            Type: list of integers representing durations of alternating 
            on and off segments, constituting a complete ringing cycle 
            starting with an on. Units in milliseconds 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 192] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            Default is fixed or provisioned. Restricted function MGs may 
            ignore cadence values they are incapable of generating. 

         Frequency 

            ParameterID: freq (0x0007) 

            Type: integer in Hz 

            Default is fixed or provisioned. Restricted function MGs may 
            ignore frequency values they are incapable of generating. 

.9.4 Statistics 

   None 

.9.5 Procedures 

   If the MGC sets an EventsDescriptor containing a hook state 
   transition event (on-hook or off-hook) with the "strict" (0x0001) 
   parameter set to "failWrong", and the hook state is already what the 
   transition implies, the execution of the command containing that 
   EventsDescriptor fails. The MG SHALL include error code 540 
   "Unexpected initial hook state" in its reponse. 

.9.6 Error code 

   This package defines a new error code: 

   540 - Unexpected initial hook state 

   The procedure for use of this code is given in E.9.5. 

    

.10  Basic Continuity Package 

   PackageID: ct (0x000a) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   This package defines events and signals for continuity test. The 
   continuity test includes provision of either a loopback or 
   transceiver functionality. 

.10.1   Properties 

   None. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 193] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.10.2   Events 

   Completion 

      EventID: cmp, 0x0005 

      This event detects test completion of continuity test. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         None 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         Result 

            ParameterID: res (0x0008) 

            Type: enumeration 

            Possible values: success (0x0001), failure (0x0000) 

.10.3   Signals 

   Continuity test 

      SignalID: ct (0x0003) 

      Initiates sending of continuity test tone on the termination to 
      which it is applied. 

      Signal Type: TimeOut 

      Default value is provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 

         None 

    
   Respond 

      SignalID: rsp (0x0004) 

      The signal is used to respond to a continuity test. See E.10.5 for 
      further explanation. 

      Signal Type: On/Off 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 194] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Default duration is provisioned 

      Additional parameters: 

         None 

.10.4   Statistics 

   None. 

.10.5   Procedures 

   When a MGC wants to initiate a continuity test, it sends a command to 
   the MG containing: 

   ò  a signals descriptor with the ct signal; and 

   ò  an events descriptor containing the cmp event. 

   Upon reception of a command containing the ct signal and cmp event, 
   the MG initiates the continuity test tone for the specified 
   Termination. If the return tone is detected and any other required 
   conditions are satisfied before the signal times out, the cmp event 
   shall be generated with the value of the result parameter equal to 
   success. In all other cases, the cmp event shall be generated with 
   the value of the result parameter equal to failure. 

   When a MGC wants the MG to respond to a continuity test, it sends a 
   command to the MG containing a signals descriptor with the rsp 
   signal. Upon reception of a command with the rsp signal, the MG 
   either applies a loopback or (for 2-wire circuits) awaits reception 
   of a continuity test tone. In the loopback case, any incoming 
   information shall be reflected back as outgoing information. In the 
   2-wire case, any time the appropriate test tone is received, the 
   appropriate response tone SHOULD be sent. The MGC determines when to 
   remove the rsp signal. 

   When a continuity test is performed on a Termination, no echo devices 
   or codecs shall be active on that Termination. 

   Performing voice path assurance as part of continuity testing is 
   provisioned by bilateral agreement between network operators. 

   (Informative Note) Example tones and test procedure details are given 
   in Q.724 sections 7 and 8, Q.764 section 2.1.8 and Q.1902.4. 

    




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 195] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


.11  Network Package 

   PackageID: nt (0x000b) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: None 

   This package defines properties of network terminations independent 
   of network type. 

.11.1   Properties 

   Maximum Jitter Buffer 

      PropertyID: jit (0x0007) 

      This property puts a maximum size on the jitter buffer. 

      Type: integer in milliseconds 

      Possible values: This property is specified in milliseconds. 

      Defined in: LocalControlDescriptor 

      Characteristics: read/write 

.11.2   Events 

   network failure 

      EventID: netfail, 0x0005 

      The termination generates this event upon detection of a failure 
      due to external or internal network reasons. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         None 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         cause 

            ParameterID: cs (0x0001) 

            Type: string 

            Possible values: any text string 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 196] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            This parameter may be included with the failure event to 
            provide diagnostic information on the reason of failure. 

    
   quality alert 

      EventID: qualert, 0x0006 

      This event allows the MG to indicate a loss of quality of the 
      network connection. The MG may do this by measuring packet loss, 
      interarrival jitter, propogation delay and then indicating this 
      using a percentage of quality loss.  

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         Threshold 

            ParameterId: th (0x0001) 

            Type: integer 

            Possible values: 0 to 99 

            Description: threshold for percent of quality loss measured, 
            calculated based on a provisioned method, that could take 
            into consideration packet loss, jitter, and delay for 
            example. Event is triggered when calculation exceeds the 
            threshold. 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         Threshold 

            ParameterId: th (0x0001) 

            Type: integer 

            Possible values: 0 to 99 

            Description: percent of quality loss measured, calculated 
            based on a provisioned method, that could take into 
            consideration packet loss, jitter, and delay for example. 

.11.3   Signals 

   None. 

.11.4   Statistics 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 197] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Duration 

      StatisticsID: dur (0x0001) 

      Description: provides duration of time the termination has been in 
      the Context. 

      Type: double, in milliseconds  

   Octets Sent 

      StatisticID: os (0x0002) 

      Type: double 

      Possible values: any 64-bit integer 

   Octets Received 

      StatisticID: or (0x0003) 

      Type: double 

      Possible values: any 64-bit integer  

.11.5   Procedures 

   None. 

    

.12  RTP Package 

   PackageID: rtp (0x000c) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: Network Package version 1 

   This package is used to support packet-based multimedia data transfer 
   by means of the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) [RFC 1889]. 

.12.1   Properties 

   None. 

.12.2   Events 

   Payload Transition 

      EventID: pltrans, 0x0001 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 198] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      This event detects and notifies when there is a transition of the 
      RTP payload format from one format to another. 

      EventDescriptor parameters 

         None 

      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters 

         ParameterName: rtppayload 

         ParameterID: rtppltype, 0x01 

         Type: list of enumerated types. 

         Possible values: The encoding method shall be specified by 
         using one or several valid encoding names, as defined in the 
         RTP AV Profile or registered with IANA. 

.12.3   Signals 

   None. 

.12.4   Statistics 

   Packets Sent 

      StatisticID: ps (0x0004) 

      Type: double 

      Possible values: any 64-bit integer 

   Packets Received 

      StatisticID: pr (0x0005) 

      Type: double 

      Possible values: any 64-bit integer 

   Packet Loss 

      StatisticID: pl (0x0006) 

      Describes the current rate of packet loss on an RTP stream, as 
      defined in IETF RFC 1889. Packet loss is expressed as percentage 
      value: number of packets lost in the interval between two 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 199] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      reception reports, divided by the number of packets expected 
      during that interval. 

      Type: double 

      Possible values: a 32-bit whole number and a 32-bit fraction. 

   Jitter 

      StatisticID: jit (0x0007) 

      Requests the current value of the interarrival jitter on an RTP 
      stream as defined in IETF RFC 1889. Jitter measures the variation 
      in interarrival time for RTP data packets. 

   Delay 

      StatisticID:delay (0x0008) 

      Requests the current value of packet propagation delay expressed 
      in timestamp units. Same as average latency. 

.12.5   Procedures 

   None. 

    

.13  TDM Circuit Package 

   PackageID: tdmc (0x000d) 
   Version: 1 
   Extends: Network Package version 1 

   This package may be used by any termination that supports gain and 
   echo control.  It was originally intended for use on TDM circuits but 
   may be more widely used. 

   New versions or extensions of this package SHOULD take non-TDM use 
   into account. 

.13.1   Properties 

   Echo Cancellation 

      PropertyID: ec (0x0008) 

      Type: boolean 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 200] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


      Possible values: 

         "on" (when the echo cancellation is requested) and 

         "off" (when it is turned off.) 

         The default is provisioned. 

         Defined in: LocalControlDescriptor 

         Characteristics: read/write 

   Gain Control 

      PropertyID: gain (0x000a) 

      Gain control, or usage of of signal level adaptation and noise 
      level reduction is used to adapt the level of the signal. However, 
      it is necessary, for example for modem calls, to turn off this 
      function. 

      Type: integer 

      Possible values: 

         The gain control parameter may either be specified as 
         "automatic" (0xffffffff), or as an explicit number of decibels 
         of gain (any other integer value). The default is provisioned 
         in the MG. 

      Defined in: LocalControlDescriptor 

      Characteristics: read/write 

.13.2   Events 

   None. 

.13.3   Signals 

   None. 

.13.4   Statistics 
   None. 

.13.5   Procedures 
   None. 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 201] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


PPENDIX I  Example Call Flows 

   All H.248.1 implementors must read the normative part of this 
   document carefully before implementing from it. No one SHOULD use the 
   examples in this appendix as stand-alone explanations of how to 
   create protocol messages. 

   The examples in this appendix use SDP for encoding of the Local and 
   Remote stream descriptors. SDP is defined in RFC 2327. If there is 
   any discrepancy between the SDP in the examples, and RFC 2327, the 
   RFC SHOULD be consulted for correctness. Audio profiles used are 
   those defined in RFC 1890, and others registered with IANA. For 
   example, G.711 A-law is called PCMA in SDP, and is assigned profile 
   0. G.723.1 is called G723 and is profile 4; H.263 is called H263 and 
   is profile 34. See also http://www.iana.org/assignments/rtp-
   parameters. 

.1   Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway Call 

   This example scenario illustrates the use of the elements of the 
   protocol to set up a Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway call 
   over an IP-based network. For simplicity, this example assumes that 
   both Residential Gateways involved in the call are controlled by the 
   same Media Gateway Controller. 

.1.1 Programming Residential GW Analog Line Terminations for Idle 
      Behaviour 

   The following illustrates the API invocations from the Media Gateway 
   Controller and Media Gateways to get the Terminations in this 
   scenario programmed for idle behaviour. Both the originating and 
   terminating Media Gateways have idle AnalogLine Terminations 
   programmed to look for call initiation events (i.e. offhook) by using 
   the Modify Command with the appropriate parameters. The null Context 
   is used to indicate that the Terminations are not yet involved in a 
   Context. The ROOT termination is used to indicate the entire MG 
   instead of a termination within the MG. 

   In this example, MG1 has the IP address 124.124.124.222, MG2 is 
   125.125.125.111, and the MGC is 123.123.123.4. The default Megaco 
   port is 55555 for all three. 

   1) An MG registers with an MGC using the ServiceChange command: 

   MG1 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222] 
   Transaction = 9998 { 
       Context = - { 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 202] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


           ServiceChange = ROOT {Services { 
               Method=Restart,  
               ServiceChangeAddress=55555, Profile=ResGW/1} 
           } 
       } 
   } 

   2) The MGC sends a reply: 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Reply = 9998 { 
      Context = - {ServiceChange = ROOT {  
        Services {ServiceChangeAddress=55555, Profile=ResGW/1} } } 
   } 
    
   3) The MGC programs a Termination in the NULL context. The 
   terminationId is A4444, the streamId is 1, the requestId in the 
   Events descriptor is 2222. The mId is the identifier of the sender of 
   this message, in this case, it is the IP address and port 
   [123.123.123.4]:55555. Mode for this stream is set to SendReceive. 
   "al" is the analog line supervision package. Local and Remote are 
   assumed to be provisioned. 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 9999 { 
       Context = - { 
           Modify = A4444 { 
               Media { Stream = 1 {  
                        LocalControl { 
                            Mode = SendReceive,  
                            tdmc/gain=2,  ; in dB,  
                            tdmc/ec=on 
                                     }, 
                                  } 
                     }, 
               Events = 2222 {al/of (strict=state)}          
           } 
       } 
   } 
    
   The dialplan script could have been loaded into the MG previously. 
   Its function would be to wait for the OffHook, turn on dialtone and 
   start collecting DTMF digits. However in this example, we use the 
   digit map, which is put into place after the offhook is detected 
   (step 5 below). 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 203] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   Note that the embedded EventsDescriptor could have been used to 
   combine steps 3 and 4 with steps 8 and 9, eliminating steps 6 and 7. 

   4) The MG1 accepts the Modify with this reply: 
    
   MG1 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Reply = 9999 { 
      Context = - {Modify = A4444} 
   } 

   5) A similar exchange happens between MG2 and the MGC, resulting in 
   an idle Termination called A5555. 

.1.2 Collecting Originator Digits and Initiating Termination 

   The following builds upon the previously shown conditions. It 
   illustrates the transactions from the Media Gateway Controller and 
   originating Media Gateway (MG1) to get the originating Termination 
   (A4444) through the stages of digit collection required to initiate a 
   connection to the terminating Media Gateway (MG2). 

   6) MG1 detects an offhook event from User 1 and reports it to the 
   Media Gateway Controller via the Notify Command.  
    
   MG1 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Transaction = 10000 { 
      Context = - { 
          Notify = A4444 {ObservedEvents =2222 { 
            19990729T22000000:al/of(init=false)}} 
      }  
   } 

   7) And the Notify is acknowledged. 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Reply = 10000 { 
       Context = - {Notify = A4444} 
   } 

   8) The MGC Modifies the Termination to play dial tone, to look for 
   digits according to Dialplan0 and to look for the on-hook event now. 

   MGC to MG1: 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 204] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 10001 { 
       Context = - { 
           Modify = A4444 { 
               Events = 2223 { 
                   al/on(strict=state), dd/ce {DigitMap=Dialplan0}            
               }, 
               Signals {cg/dt},  
               DigitMap= Dialplan0{ 
   (0| 00|[1-7]xxx|8xxxxxxx|Fxxxxxxx|Exx|91xxxxxxxxxx|9011x.)}    
           } 
       } 
   }  

   9) And the Modify is acknowledged. 
    
   MG1 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Reply = 10001 { 
       Context = - {Modify = A4444} 
   } 

   10)   Next, digits are accumulated by MG1 as they are dialed by User 
   1.  Dialtone is stopped upon detection of the first digit. When an 
   appropriate match is made of collected digits against the currently 
   programmed Dialplan for A4444, another Notify is sent to the Media 
   Gateway Controller. 

   MG1 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Transaction = 10002 { 
      Context = - { 
          Notify = A4444 {ObservedEvents =2223 { 
            19990729T22010001:dd/ce{ds="916135551212",Meth=UM}}} 
      }  
   } 

   11)   And the Notify is acknowledged. 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Reply = 10002 { 
       Context = - {Notify = A4444} 
   } 




roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 205] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   12)   The controller then analyses the digits and determines that a 
   connection needs to be made from MG1 to MG2. Both the TDM termination 
   A4444, and an RTP termination are added to a new Context in MG1. Mode 
   is ReceiveOnly since Remote descriptor values are not yet specified. 
   Preferred codecs are in the MGC's preferred order of choice. 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 10003 { 
       Context = $ { 
          Add = A4444,  
          Add = $ { 
              Media {  
                Stream = 1 {  
                     LocalControl {                            
                         Mode = ReceiveOnly,  
    
                         nt/jit=40 ; in ms 
                     }, 
                     Local { 
   v=0                                
   c=IN IP4 $                                
   m=audio $ RTP/AVP 4 
   a=ptime:30 
   v=0                                
   c=IN IP4 $                                
   m=audio $ RTP/AVP 0 
                     } 
                } 
             }     
          } 
       } 
   }   

   NOTE - The MGC states its preferred parameter values as a series of 
   SDP blocks in Local. The MG fills in the Local descriptor in the 
   Reply. 

   13)   MG1 acknowledges the new Termination and fills in the Local IP 
   address and UDP port. It also makes a choice for the codec based on 
   the MGC preferences in Local. MG1 sets the RTP port to 2222. 
    
   MG1->MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Reply = 10003 { 
      Context = 2000 {  
         Add = A4444, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 206] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


         Add=A4445{ 
            Media {  
                Stream = 1 { 
                    Local { 
   v=0                                
   o=- 2890844526 2890842807 IN IP4 124.124.124.222 
   s=- 
   t= 00                               
   c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222                                
   m=audio 2222 RTP/AVP 4 
   a=ptime:30 
   a=recvonly 
                    } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4 
                } 
            } 
         } 
      } 
   } 

   14)   The MGC will now associate A5555 with a new Context on MG2, and 
   establish an RTP Stream (i.e. A5556 will be assigned), SendReceive 
   connection through to the originating user, User 1. The MGC also sets 
   ring on A5555. 

   MGC to MG2: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 50003 { 
       Context = $ {  
          Add = A5555  { Media {  
               Stream = 1 {  
                    LocalControl {Mode = SendReceive} }}, 
         Events=1234{al/of(strict=state)},  
               Signals {al/ri} 
               }, 
          Add  = $ {Media {  
               Stream = 1 {  
                    LocalControl {   
                       Mode = SendReceive, 
                       nt/jit=40 ; in ms 
                    }, 
                    Local { 
   v=0 
   c=IN IP4 $  
   m=audio $ RTP/AVP 4  
   a=ptime:30 
                    }, 
                    Remote { 
   v=0 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 207] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222  
   m=audio 2222 RTP/AVP 4  
   a=ptime:30 
                    } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4  
                } 
             } 
         } 
      } 
   } 

   15)   This is acknowledged. The stream port number is different from 
   the control port number. In this case it is 1111 (in SDP). 
    
   MG2 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Reply = 50003 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
      Add = A5555, 
         Add = A5556{ 
            Media {  
               Stream = 1 {  
                   Local { 
   v=0 
   o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4 125.125.125.111 
   s=- 
   t= 00 
   c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111  
   m=audio 1111 RTP/AVP 4 
   }  
               } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4 
            } 
          } 
      } 
   } 

   16)   The above IPAddr and UDPport need to be given to MG1 now. 

   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 10005 { 
     Context = 2000 { 
       Modify = A4444 { 
         Signals {cg/rt} 
       }, 
       Modify = A4445 { 
          Media {  
               Stream = 1 {  


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 208] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                   Remote { 
   v=0 
   o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4 125.125.125.111 
   s=- 
   t= 00 
   c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111  
   m=audio 1111 RTP/AVP 4 
                   }  
               } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4 
           } 
       } 
     } 
   } 
    
   MG1 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Reply = 10005 { 
      Context = 2000 {Modify = A4444, Modify = A4445} 
   } 

   17)   The two gateways are now connected and User 1 hears the 
   RingBack. The MG2 now waits until User2 picks up the receiver and 
   then the two-way call is established. 

   From MG2 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Transaction = 50005 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
          Notify = A5555 {ObservedEvents =1234 { 
            19990729T22020002:al/of(init=false)}} 
      }  
   } 
    
   From MGC to MG2: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Reply = 50005 { 
       Context = - {Notify = A5555} 
   } 
    
   From MGC to MG2: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 50006 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
         Modify = A5555 { 
            Events = 1235 {al/on(strict=state)}, 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 209] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


            Signals { } ; to turn off ringing  
         } 
      } 
   } 
    
   From MG2 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Reply = 50006 { 
    Context = 5000 {Modify = A4445} 
   } 

   18)   Change mode on MG1 to SendReceive, and stop the ringback. 
    
   MGC to MG1: 

   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 10006 { 
      Context = 2000 { 
         Modify = A4445 { 
            Media {  
               Stream = 1 {  
                  LocalControl { 
                     Mode=SendReceive 
                  }  
               } 
            } 
         }, 
         Modify = A4444 { 
            Signals { } 
         }         
      } 
   } 
    
   from MG1 to MGC: 

   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 
   Reply = 10006 { 
      Context = 2000 {Modify = A4445, Modify = A4444}} 
    
   19)   The MGC decides to Audit the RTP termination on MG2. 
    
   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 50007 { 
      Context = - {AuditValue = A5556{  
         Audit{Media, DigitMap, Events, Signals, Packages, Statistics }} 
      }   
   } 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 210] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   20)   The MG2 replies. 
    
   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Reply = 50007 { 
      Context = - { 
         AuditValue = A5556 { 
             Media {  
                TerminationState { ServiceStates = InService,  
              Buffer = OFF },  
             Stream = 1 {  
                    LocalControl { Mode = SendReceive,  
                       nt/jit=40 }, 
                    Local { 
   v=0 
   o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4 125.125.125.111 
   s=- 
   t= 00 
   c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111  
   m=audio 1111 RTP/AVP  4  
   a=ptime:30 
                   }, 
                    Remote { 
   v=0 
   o=- 2890844526 2890842807 IN IP4 124.124.124.222 
   s=- 
   t= 00 
   c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222  
   m=audio 2222 RTP/AVP  4 
   a=ptime:30   
                    } } }, 
             Events,  
          Signals,  
          DigitMap,  
          Packages {nt-1, rtp-1}, 
             Statistics { rtp/ps=1200,  ; packets sent 
                          nt/os=62300, ; octets sent 
                          rtp/pr=700, ; packets received 
                          nt/or=45100, ; octets received 
                          rtp/pl=0.2,  ; % packet loss  
                          rtp/jit=20,  
                          rtp/delay=40 } ; avg latency  
          } 
       }     
   } 
    
   21)   When the MGC receives an onhook signal from one of the MGs, it 
   brings down the call. In this example, the user at MG2 hangs up 
   first. 
    


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 211] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   From MG2 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Transaction = 50008 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
          Notify = A5555 {ObservedEvents =1235 { 
             19990729T24020002:al/on(init=false)} 
          } 
      }  
   } 
    
   From MGC to MG2: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Reply = 50008 { 
       Context = - {Notify = A5555} 
   } 

   22)   The MGC now sends both MGs a Subtract to take down the call. 
   Only the subtracts to MG2 are shown here. Each termination has its 
   own set of statistics that it gathers. An MGC may not need to request 
   both to be returned. A5555 is a physical termination, and A5556 is an 
   RTP termination. 
    
   From MGC to MG2: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 
   Transaction = 50009 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
         Subtract = A5555 {Audit{Statistics}}, 
         Subtract = A5556 {Audit{Statistics}} 
      } 
   } 
    
   From MG2 to MGC: 
    
   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 
   Reply = 50009 { 
      Context = 5000 { 
        Subtract = A5555 { 
             Statistics {  
                nt/os=45123, ; Octets Sent 
                nt/dur=40 ; in seconds 
                } 
          }, 
          Subtract = A5556 { 
             Statistics { 
                rtp/ps=1245, ; packets sent 
                nt/os=62345, ; octets sent 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 212] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                rtp/pr=780, ; packets received 
                nt/or=45123, ; octets received 
                rtp/pl=10, ;  % packets lost 
                rtp/jit=27, 
                rtp/delay=48 ; average latency 
             } 
          } 
      } 
   } 

   23)   The MGC now sets up both MG1 and MG2 to be ready to detect the 
   next off-hook event. See step 1. Note that this could be the default 
   state of a termination in the null context, and if this were the 
   case, no message need be sent from the MGC to the MG. Once a 
   termination returns to the null context, it goes back to the default 
   termination values for that termination. 



































roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 213] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


PPENDIX II CHANGES FROM RFC XXXX [draft-ietf-megaco-3015corr-02.txt] 

   Section  Source Description 

   Abstract PTT    Describes changes between v1 and v2. 

   1        Edit   Added instructions on indication of versions in 
                    ServiceChangeVersion. 

   2.1      Edit   Added references to H.248.4, H.248.5. 

   5        PTT    New approach to discrepancy between ITU-T and IETF 
                    definition of "SHOULD". 

   6 para 2 List   Deleted "modem" [parameters] from last sentence. 

   6.2 para Edit   Replaced "taken out of the call it is in" with 
   4                "subtracted from a context". 

   6.2      Edit   Rewritten to clarify. 
   final 
   para 

   6.2.4    List   Added note that use of Modem descriptor is 
   table            deprecated. 

   6.2.5    AVD    Added ability to set signals on ROOT.  Affects first 
                    para, Modify. 

   6.2.5    Edit   Added clarifying phrase "as an entity in itself". 
   first 
   para 

   7.1.2    List   Added para spelling out deprecation of Modem 
                    descriptor. 

   7.1.3    AVD    Added Nx64K multiplex type with description. 

   7.1.7    Edit   Removed "under" in last sentence, so that all cases 
   first            of specification can be seen to apply. 
   para 

   7.1.12   AVD    Added ability to specify individual property, event, 
                    signal or statistics to be audited. 

   7.1.12   List   Noted deprecation of Modem descriptor. 

   7.1.14.3 AVD    Added ability to specify value of "long duration" 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 214] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                    threshold within the digit map itself. 

   7.1.14.4 AVD    Added text requiring digit buffering and spelling 
                    out procedures, if EventBufferControl is OFF. 

   7.1.14.5 AVD    Added text on handling of buffered digits. 
   step 2) 

   7.1.14.5 AVD    Added provision for inclusion of indication of which 
   step 2)          timer expired if digit map completion event allows 
                    this. 

   7.1.14.5 AVD    Added text providing alternatives for handling of 
   step 5)          excess digits. 

   7.1.14.7 AVD    Added text on applicability of this clause to 
   final            buffered digits. 
   bullet 

   7.1.18   AVD    Added ability to specify topology by stream: mention 
                    in para 3, new paras before introduction to figures, 
                    new Figure 8. 

   7.2.1,   List   Deprecation of Modem descriptor noted. 
   7.2.2, 
   7.2.3, 
   7.2.4, 
   7.2.5, 
   7.2.6 

   7.2.5,   AVD    Added ability to audit individual property, event, 
   7.2.6            signal or statistics.  Added detailed instructions 
                    for this. 

   7.2.8    AVD    Added ability to indicate capability change to be 
                    audited: added ServiceChangeInfo to bulleted list of 
                    contents of ServiceChange descriptor, added para 
                    explaining what it is for. 

   7.2.8    Edit   Para following new ServiceChangeInfo para: cleanup 
                    of wording in second sentence on registration with 
                    Failover method. 

   7.2.8    AVD    Bullet dealing with ServiceChangeProfile on 
                    registration: added text on procedures associated 
                    with profiles. 

   7.2.8    AVD    Added 916 and 917 ServiceChangeReasons. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 215] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   7.2.9    AVD    Added text describing the auditing of context 
                    properties. 

   7.3      Edit   Deleted.  Explanation of error descriptors is now in 
                    section 7.1.19, and error codes are documented in 
                    H.248.8. 

   8.2.3    AVD    Added text on properties and procedures to limite 
                    the number of pending notices sent for a given 
                    transaction. 

   8.3      Edit   Added sentence indicating that messages conforming 
   second           to this document specify version 2 of the protocol. 
   para 

   9        Edit   Added mention of H.248.4 and H.248.5 (were 
                    transport-related Annexes to H.248). 

   11       AAP    Second para demoted to Note to resolve objection 
                    during ITU-T Last Call process. 

   11.3     Edit   Modified first sentence to refer specifically to 
                    ServiceChange commands constituting registrations.  
                    [Hidden issue: reestablishment of contact with 
                    Disconnected method does not constitute 
                    registration.]  Added second sentence requiring that 
                    the registration message always conform to version 1 
                    [to ensure interoperability before common working 
                    version can be established]. 

   12.1.1   Edit   Slight clarification of "designed to be extended 
                    only" description. 

   13       AVD    New section providing extended description of 
                    profile contents and registration. 

   14 and   Edit   Renumbered as a result of the new Profile section. 
   sub-
   sections 

   14.4     AVD    IANA considerations for profiles added. 

   A.2      Edit   Added object identifier including version to ASN.1 
                    header. 

   A.2      AVD    Production TopologyRequest: added optional streamId. 

   A.2      AVD    Production AuditDescriptor: added auditPropertyToken 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 216] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


                    term for more specific audit items. 

   A.2      AVD    New productions IndAuditParameter through 
                    IndAudPackagesDescriptor added for more specific 
                    audit items. 

   A.2      AVD    Production MuxType: added nx64k. 

   A.2      AVD    Production DigitMapValue: added durationTimer term. 

   A.2      AVD    Production ServiceChangeParm: added 
                    serviceChangeInfo term. 

   A.3      AVD    Production digitMapLetter: added "T" for start 
                    timer. 

   A.3      Edit   Production pathDomainName: added "*" and ".". 

   B.2      Edit   Production message: version changed to 2 in comment. 

   B.2      Post-  Production transactionAck: TransactionID 
            edit   capitalized. 

   B.2      PTT    Productions contextID, terminationID, and 
                    terminationIDList reordered: grouped with 
                    TransactionID to make fundamental productions more 
                    visible.  

   B.2      AVD    Production MuxType: added Nx64kToken. 

   B.2      AVD    Production digitMapValue: added ["Z" COLON Timer 
                    COMMA] alternative. 

   B.2      AVD    Production digitMapLetter: added "T" (start timer) 
                    alternative. 

   B.2      AVD    Production auditItem: added indAudterminationAudit 
                    term. 

   B.2      AVD    New productions indAudterminationAudit through 
                    indAudpackagesDescriptor added for more specific 
                    auditing. 

   B.2      AVD    Production ServiceChangeParm: term auditItem added 
                    to indicate nature of capability change. 

   B.2      AVD    Production topologyTriple: optional eventStream 
                    (sic) term added. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 217] 
                     Megaco Protocol version 2          October 2002 


   B.2      AVD    New production Nx64kToken. 

   C.1      Edit   ACodec: reference corrected to Q.765.5 

   E.2.1    Edit   Editorial correction to informal name of property 
                    maxNumberOfContexts. 

   E.2.1    AVD    Added properties to govern TransactionPending 
                    retransmissions. 

   E.4      Edit   Added extend-only package usage indicator. 

   E.7.3    Edit   Added "recording" qualifier to warning tone. 
   table 

   E.11.2   Edit   For quality alert event: replaced "property" with 
                    "event" in description. 

   Appendix Edit   Expanded on codec examples.  Added reference to IANA 
   I second         registry for RTP payload types. 
   para 

                    

    
    
     
    
    
    
    
    
    
NTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS   

   The ITU draws attention to the possibility that the practice or 
   implementation of this Recommendation may involve the use of a 
   claimed Intellectual Property Right. The ITU takes no position 
   concerning the evidence, validity or applicability of claimed 
   Intellectual Property Rights, whether asserted by ITU members or 
   others outside of the Recommendation development process. 

   As of the date of approval of this Recommendation, the ITU had 
   received notice of intellectual property, protected by patents, which 
   may be required to implement this Recommendation. However, 
   implementors are cautioned that this may not represent the latest 
   information and are therefore strongly urged to consult the TSB 
   patent database. 



roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 218] 
                          Megaco version 2               October 2002 


   The IETF has also received notice of intellectual property claims 
   relating to Megaco/H.248.1.  Please consult the IETF IPR 
   announcements at http://www.ietf.org/ipr.html. 

    
cknowledgments 

   Megaco/H.248.1 is the result of hard work by many people in both the 
   IETF and in ITU-T Study Group 16.  This section records those who 
   played a prominent role in ITU-T meetings, on the Megaco list, or 
   both. 

   Megaco/H.248 owes a large initial debt to the MGCP protocol (RFC 
   2705), and thus to its authors, Mauricio Arango, Andrew Dugan, Ike 
   Elliott, Christian Huitema, and Scott Pickett.  Flemming Andreasen 
   does not appear on this list of authors, but was a major contributor 
   to the development of both MGCP and Megaco/H.248.1.  draft-andreasen-
   mgcp-rfc2705bis-04.txt has an extensive acknowledgement of many other 
   people who worked on media gateway control before Megaco got started. 

   The authors of the first Megaco RFCs (2885, then 3015) were Fernando 
   Cuervo, Nancy Greene, Abdallah Rayhan, Christian Huitema, Brian 
   Rosen, and John Segers.  Christian Groves conceived and was editor of 
   Annex C.  The people most active on the Megaco list in the period 
   leading up to the completion of RFC 2885 were Brian Rosen, Tom 
   Taylor, Nancy Greene, Christian Huitema, Matt Holdrege, Chip Sharp, 
   John Segers, Michael Thomas, Henry Sinnreich, and Paul Sijben.  The 
   people who sacrificed sleep and meals to complete the massive amount 
   of work required in the decisive Study Group 16 meeting of February, 
   2000, were Michael Brown, Ranga Dendi, Larry Forni, Glen Freundlich, 
   Christian Groves, Alf Heidemark, Steve Magnell, Selvam Rengasami, 
   Rich Rubin, Klaus Sambor, John Segers, Chip Sharp, Tom Taylor, and 
   Stephen Terrill. 

   The most active people on the Megaco list in the period since the 
   February 2000 have been Tom Taylor, Brian Rosen, Christian Groves, 
   Madhu Babu Brahmanapally, Troy Cauble, Terry Anderson, Chuong Nguyen, 
   and Kevin Boyle, but many other people have been regular 
   contributors.  Brian Rosen did tremendous service in putting together 
   the Megaco interoperability tests.  On the Study Group 16 side, the 
   editorial team for the final document in February, 2002 included 
   Christian Groves, Marcello Pantaleo, Terry Anderson, Peter Leis, 
   Kevin Boyle, and Tom Taylor. 

   Tom Taylor as Megaco Chair managed the day to day operation of the 
   Megaco list, with Brian Rosen taking an equal share of the burden for 
   most of the last three years.  Glen Freundlich as the Study Group 16 
   Rapporteur ran the ITU-T meetings and ensured that all of the work at 
   hand was completed.  Without Glen's determination the Megaco/H.248 


roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 219] 
                          Megaco version 2               October 2002 


   standard would have taken at least half a year longer to produce.  
   Christian Groves filled in ably as Rapporteur when Glen could no 
   longer take part. 

    
uthors' Addresses 

   Terry L Anderson 
   Lucent Technologies/INS/Voice Over IP Access Networks 
   Rm 2G-219A, 101 Crawfords Corner Rd, Holmdel, NJ 07733-3030 
   Phone: +1.732.949.5628 
   Email: tla@lucent.com 
    
   Christian Groves 
   Ericsson AsiaPacificLab Australia 
   37/360 Elizabeth St 
   Melbourne, Victoria 3000 
   Australia 
   Email: Christian.Groves@ericsson.com.au 
    
   Marcello Pantaleo 
   Ericsson Eurolab Deutschland 
   Ericsson Allee 1 
   52134 Herzogenrath, Germany 
   e-mail: Marcello.Pantaleo@eed.ericsson.se 
    
   Tom Taylor 
   Nortel Networks 
   1852 Lorraine Ave, 
   Ottawa, Ontario 
   Canada K1H 6Z8 
   Phone: +1 613 736 0961 
   E-mail: taylor@nortelnetworks.com 

     

    














roves et al             Expires - April 2003               [Page 220] 

PAFTECH AB 2003-20262026-04-24 06:08:38